Home

2012 Jeep Liberty Owner`s Guide

1. 162 Hill Descent Control Indicator 232 363 MEE Entry PE 20 Instrument Cluster 5 24 EER adm BERE DE 158 226 laghis Op Reminder ias pet E es 161 LOW Puel iste ER EE x5 SR OER 9 ets 226 ee Id Oil Pressure n3 84 EE EE 231 Park 43 4444 5093 ee eee ROG RPM MERE RR ee 158 I n PPP 162 Rear Desde sin doe scs ced atone n dod ed 503 Kear Dl 4x oa eae 2 05 S EEUU Ee Ed 503 Seat Belt Reminder 238 OORE serens ces eSI UGEGICEGG 3 500 501 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 228 Side Marker 142352 er ed Fe eS 502 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 226 391 Tow Haul Indicator is i ese e 44 86 44 5 232 Traction Control 122 2 ce es 369 Transfer Case uou dore ER EER He EU 338 344 TUTO os decido REDE 92 158 162 502 503 Watley VITOR PD NM 102 VON EE C CM EES 5 RAAR ED Ee 230 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 226 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 225 Load Floor Cars asse aet BE RUE Kar Ee ke 209 N INDEX 545 BOATO Velde 24 4526 ok ERAS tena tee ts 408 Es AAR amp os aaa ETE EE RS ee 0 0 LOCKS aai Gos BESEER PERE OD AE AAR 30 Auto Unlock tse EER EER EER EA 32 Automatic Door AE RE eX 393 3953 3x3 32 Child Protection 69x RR ERE RS 35 DOOR 22 asse iek EDELE obs AAR 30 Power Door isi kke bies 0a ede o dn 31 Low Tire Pressure System e aie sopa HOEDE veg 391 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren CANI reei tener EE eae 6 Sale ye eo NN 82 83
2. 957 Ant Lock Brake System serseri korr 358 Drake Assist SIEL eran DE SR UP HEAD himi 359 Electronic Roll Mitigation 360 Traction Control Systemi 53 et ar EE 358 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 360 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 173 Electronic Stability Control ESC 365 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 241 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher oos eie dees EES 436 ACM og teat On EL EE DEE ES 437 Jump SEEN uus hada cb eee see Stee 446 Overlie ne 21 apeadevtehteae reasons 436 Emission Control System Maintenance 461 Ini bee de EA cee ee eae ade Gees 459 Pit T TOO a5 sane ed 9 3 9 0 CRGO PORE sean 467 Plock Heater ce ne AE REEKS SEE IRE E PS 323 Break In Recommendations 88 Checking Oil Level is 944954554 tis 464 COMpPATIMCRE oeste foe EES REDE sess 4 459 N INDEX 539 Coolant Antifreeze 00 475 505 CODIIBS 5 4565 4364 ORE RR HOS HE oq os 475 Exhaust Gas Caution 89 405 Fails ae EA AAR N ON TEE EG 922 Hooded MNS cis ears he se eee aged 322 Piel Requirements a xa is don sone sso nars 401 Turnp SEED xc ae vx E Eie Sa AS e Os 446 Cd 2486s thee heG5an este aes es 464 504 505 Oil Change Interval lt yiceavaus di 238 245 465 Oil illef Cap aac waarde ae aas ad es 466 OUTING eena 466 Oil Filter Disposal es re 6236 34 4 ED EN 466 Oil Selection a 465 504 Oi SUBIBEUG tes er EX
3. 045639060 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level reguire air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment 045639061 You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72 F 22 C for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in
4. N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449 WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id FREEING A STUCK
5. 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Button The window lockout button on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the rear doors To disable the window control on the other doors press and release the window LOCKOUT button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press and release the window LOCKOUT but ton again setting it in the up position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the Qo windows down or the sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky Slider open adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Window Lockout Button 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
6. 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger ALR Second Row ALR Cinching ALR Latch Plate e N A Not Applicable N A e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occ
7. 494 eG Ti ewe s AT 506 N Replacement Bulbs 0 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L JE NS cas n m A N GE DPE Ves Landi e A I 8 i l 071007127 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 1 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Integrated Power Module Fuses 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivabilit
8. ee 506 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 505 Poe Light Service 4445 boue dus eee ees ene ES 502 Foelie 45446433545 RE SEES 158 161 229 502 Folde REE SCA sies EER 2222225 2 BREED EES 149 Four Wheel Drive SHINS oop egre eens RR ED RS 334 336 340 342 EENS fans dane cee eee ee was AE 334 340 Four Wheel Drive Operation 334 Freeing A Stick Velde sis atau 2 pua x px Cosas 450 Front Axle Differential 485 Fuel rr OE EE EF EES EF 401 nona AE EET ESE PES 404 iur ACC C 402 ESO seen Qaem arare SOR Rr eq dedos 402 Filler Cap OaS CaP cessa e ee Re atn 406 erc 401 fou n 226 Materials Added iss seer op e iiis 404 Meisie Stun wasp eg eig tuom d AE FOR EP EIE 402 Ocdane ROUND usos doi PEE aed EUR S 401 505 RRCGUINCIICING 44446444 0 6554 4 4 faa EES 401 opeeliea lis aca ws Ewa Ed a ERKEN arise 505 Tank GC Opal ie tae uoce dos Sd e ood 504 N INDEX 541 FUSES 2444456555 be 43445 EE KAR ES ERES 494 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 185 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap ese hes 406 408 460 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge i 2 uk EES EE RA SUR 226 Gasoline Fuel gant d d KRAMER RE RA Xs 401 Gasoline Clean Air 222229 429 9559 402 Gasoline Reformulated 402 Gauges Coolant Temperature uuu 24 0 6 se hc godes 299 Ie 2225993 3954 EE SN MES 226 Odometer s oh oa tv th eee EEE Ee ees 236 PPeCUOMClC sai echoes na pera een A 229 Tachometer otc sp
9. 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 81cb44fe HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 034033576 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Prog
10. e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry e Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following while you are programming the universal trans two conditions ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door 2 This device must accept any interference that may be opener that has a stop and reverse feature as received including interference that may cause undesired required by Federal safety standards This includes operation most garage door opener models manufactured NOTE after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas e The term IC before the certification registration nu
11. specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a guick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adeguate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle
12. ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles gASCAP Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CHAngE OIL Message Base And Mid Line Clusters Only Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator syst
13. If the transmission operating temperature exceeds nor mal operating limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat ing If the transmission becomes extremely hot the Trans mission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold tempera tures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to second gear only Normal operation will re sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level 2 Second This range is used for moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift into second gear Will not shift into third gear 1 First This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Pro
14. M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 513 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule m m Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authori
15. NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 32 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will
16. REEDE IEE INTRODUCTION 44399388 9 959 80 n ER WK RE eae ea EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 4 Vehicle Identification Number 5 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows you
17. The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the coolin
18. The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle 036407502 Wiper Washer Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper opera tion Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper opera tion 031507503 Front Wiper Control NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while they are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON position 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed CAUTION Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause through an automatic car wash Damage to the between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind windshield wipers may result if the wiper control shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and is left in any position other than off then turn the end of the lever
19. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drink ing don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive his manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu J Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Copyright 2011 Chrysler Group LLC A dy m O c
20. e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits actly when installing an infant or child restraint Carefully follow the instructions that come with the A rearward facing infant restraint should only be restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re not work when you need it straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors an
21. ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPARS Total Clean or equivalent and if necessary follow with MOPARS Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR
22. 2 LO Fluid And Filter Changes 072607575 is disassembled for any reason 1 Fill Plug 2 Drain Plug N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only to fill hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Draining Fluid First remove the fill plug 1 then the drain plug 2 Recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs You could damage them and cause a leak Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the fluid becomes contaminated with water Change the fluid immediately if contaminated with water Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check e Front axle lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill
23. 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the freguency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Tum the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL contr
24. Active Head Restraint is deployed Rear Head Restraints The two outboard seat are equipped with adjustable head restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint Io lower the head restraint press the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Test c 030933390 Adjustment Button NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on tether routing WARNINCG Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat Feature To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to position the front seat to its mid track position Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi tioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold
25. Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure f those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow l i se you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is ing precautions are not observed running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to parking brake shift the transmission into PARK a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should b
26. If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags 022633375 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows
27. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 4 The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure 400 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id value The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to remind you to service the flat tire Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid
28. To transfer an ongoing call NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the VR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the vR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press
29. Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents ste
30. frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position 022607378 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 ON Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate
31. have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445 WARNING WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack 12 Remove blocks from wheels handle counterclockwise Road Tire Installation 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug each lug nut is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the nuts correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel 446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING JUMP ST
32. may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or its occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h using the Preferred Procedure or completely stopped using the Alternate Procedure Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow the vehicle speed to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling move the transfer case switch to the ra desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Move the transfer case switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear NOTE Steps 1 and 2 in the Preferred Procedure and the Alternate Procedure are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in process then the indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a shift move the transfer case switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the
33. press MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat will stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 68 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 23 mm and 68 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature i
34. press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING ts 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside WARNING Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in gency your mobile phone must be the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour e turned on Towing Assistance references e paired to the Uconnect System e If supported this number may be programmable on e and have network coverage some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used i
35. some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The SABIC will not deploy in all side collisions SABIC deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN positions If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light for four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in an
36. ss oes d RE 241 agii MP RT 250 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center Elapsed Tie ose woke a dev a wg He ae 251 EVIC Displays 0 0 0 eene 243 GEVIC Units Selection Units In Display 251 ei eee i System Stats 67640455 ex ve Shoes CE ELA DU 251 E EVI Mam Ment s 44 0 sg drin et ose aS 246 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 25 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo ll Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If MP3 WMA AUX jack seders ados Hos a 256 EQUIPPCG ra cd ene ed Up e uio t Red DE 275 D Operating Instructions Radio Mode 256 D Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped 275 D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 264 D Operating Instructions TM 1 3 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 266 LU CODEC Mi EKT aa aise Button ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES 276 Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 269 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 276 O Info Button D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 269 And MP3 Audio Play ssis 24 9644 es 279 O Uconnect Multimedia H Notes On Playing MP3 Files 281 Satellite Radio If Equipped ad D Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 284 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INST
37. tions and may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened 408 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e f the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further review Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic Sys tem in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further in
38. 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location DEERE ARES E APARIF ERIE RE RS AT ESS RE PERSE PRES ELIA Boe SRS SESE RPO RES PRS SSS NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed SEATING CAPACI TOAL S PRONI DEE on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location 376 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry
39. 20 EER HE OE TOET oe oe Hee ene 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 162 Lane Change Assist id RE EIC Re gd d 162 Lap Shoulder BENS seses ap ERROR e rias 45 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 82 83 lud CCP LETT 92 sio or C Hm 156 Lead Free Gasoline 64 4665 ou 5h IR eee ees hess 401 Leaks Fluid sae oe ooo UAR S UR ER SU E 92 Lite Or lae pP 386 Eis AAR EE OE EE hes eon EE OG 40 Litteale Flipper Glass is d Eb READ Ra wi 41 Licht Bel us uuo xerit r Som 9 Seg RARR os 92 500 lera P 92 158 vide ARE AE AE oes EE EE 67 76 90 241 A LOER aan ee PETIT 291 Automatic Headlights Len 159 o Pr P 503 Battery caver ona Yeerks eae HA PAAS 164 Brake Assist Warning ss ssa ieas nemas 369 Brake Warning sissies EWE RR RR 239 bulb Replacement 122253244 maed 200 501 rr 164 d TRE 238 Daytime RUNNING siste ete 4uee RR 161 Dimmer Switch Headlight Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 369 Engine Temperature Warning 233 uo T 2 HOW PPP ARE 161 229 502 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 232 233 235 338 344 Hazard Warning Flasher 2e xov um 436 Lied due a sceau DES REALM ag as 158 Headli Dig uoa meg edse AREA RE RE 158 501 He adlisbts On Reminder see yee ee d lt ox 161 Headlights On With Wipers 160 170 PERDON he oda ttc oo oe Oo hae eee 162 229 High Beam Indicator s 2464244644 dw hos 229 High Beam Low Beam Select
40. 486 S n Visor EXtenSio sse skep 133 5 exe deg 103 Du nroor Maintenance seasan de wed deae hie ao Hd 197 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 60 DV MINCUGENGING ON a viu sees sei os eee HE 466 bystem NeMOle SOUS 0 244 4084 Re fae EERS 27 Tachometer 24 66 66 ooo BE ERGE dai HARE sS 231 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 307 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 233 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 82 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tie Down Hooks Cargo nis eee cues ERES 211 Till Steering CODD sesde eio oie hd 170 172 Time Delay Headlight src aara d vaa qe E EE S 160 jo co Ap 322 Tire and Loading Information Placard 375 Tire Identification Number TIN 373 Tire MEE ES 2 xine 44 oa ue eaa Va ROS RR Di 370 Tire Safety Information s sus Pa Essa xo riesi 370 jn A Ait Diresstte mee EER Hd der e E EX OES ara PCT EES NS 4445424445 p et epee eee S P IPSE Compact Spare 552 INDEX aaa Id General Information 979 Lo Seed se 9702 32 E oe PR EED 382 Inflation EES NES sss gar SERE HAS 360 AE AE PE 437 ESI OI dies eoa Sure bs d ub eee AS 386 Load Capacity i errre cose RE as 375 376 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 391 Pressure Warning Light 226 Ede lit GES serrer srna SPOED dees 591 cric PD 382 Replacement sas ee soe t HOE DE OE 387 ROTON 5 yy ache ae e
41. 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 528 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for t
42. API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Engine Oil Viscosity SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental additives other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your
43. Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and type The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Inflator Units The Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC may deploy during rollovers and collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle depending on the severity and t
44. DVD 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to
45. Disposal P 478 Appearance C ME caeno ence ke uires DA E ee 488 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assist Hill Start 0 2 0 0 00005 360 Posisiahce TOWNE AREA KEEL DERE AR H 117 Auto Down Power Windows 36 Auto Unlock Doors 246654444 Rm 32 Automatic Dimming MITTOE ies sk m ionis 100 N INDEX 535 Automatic Door Locks 2 iS EWER EEUE FR 32 Agtomauc FHeadlishts 22253444404 RED RS 159 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 238 245 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 307 Automatic Transaxle sa sis 2 a4 RE ae 9 Ve 324 Special ddilivEs i a sca doe 9 HEDE HE eens 483 Automatic Transmission 326 482 484 Adding FUNG iese ene SR RES 484 506 Fluid and Filter Changes esxes3 vue xs 482 484 Ehud Change 44 aawee dh oe N EE ii 484 bro Level CHECK uus eru mro oo ee dd 483 DIT DE esca weRATAGd REA EN ES 482 506 Sean dN ATP 326 Special MAGUIVES s dcs 92 94305 9e P CE ee as 483 Torque Convener 24 qoibas sprime SNR Rd 334 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 203 Auxthary Power Outlet sussa REFERS 203 Pode ME 4 osse RAPISPRESI INE NAMSSPORIA 8 506 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 506 B Pillar LOCAHOIE visa ss RE on DE bu PA SEES PME 079 Es RE OT FEE FEES A68 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Belts Seat s iugo ER oem ER Bae cs d R 45 90 Body Mechanism Lubrication aa 471 Drake Assist System vaste Sox euer em REDS 959 Brak
46. ER 291 Shift Lever Override llle 451 Shifting Automatic Transmission 326 Transfer Case sess 334 336 340 342 Shoulder Belts 222 so bat aaa 45 Side View Mirror Adjustment 100 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 314 orals TUN 2 aor ey ES PR DR HE 92 162 229 502 503 Sky Slider Power Roof sae 46x99 198 486 Snow Chains Tire Chains 388 aie DS au Re eer RR E d PUR 383 384 438 SPEK PINE PM DR EE RM eran 505 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 0000 ee ee 505 Pm 465 505 Speed Control Cruise Control us es ers 173 DDOCOOIIGI E s conu Ss ua SE PARU oe DERE 229 DIGGS sud verb ek EERDER HY d PI 27 921 Cold Weather oase pas se ig ER vi EA EE pi 322 Eugine Block Heater uae RR RE DE 323 Fagine Falls tO Siati adesse Rad eames 322 KEMOL ss koe esr i edi b S RE aur ED Bu 27 Starting and Operating i 3 X9 recreates 321 Starting Procedures ex 22559 880 p 99 ERRORS 921 N INDEX 551 Steering Power lt 4 54 Rabe he bak bee ERES 591 352 dil OMNI sod dei ae ORE SEED 2 ES 170 172 Wheel Tilt eese 170 172 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 301 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Dystem COnWOls 44 44 42s mp EL DRAG d ae 301 DIOIQGS ia x ede sq ERG IER CES RA 207 DIOIdSe Pill is Reede as VER a YoEeirzS eP E 208 oioiape Velle saasa aiaa HY EERDER s HE 313 SUCK Picci PL ORE EDE 450 DUN ROOL EM 195 Sun Roof Sky Slider Power visas RR esse 198
47. If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing and moves the sunroof in the opposite direction press the switch forward and hold This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half sec ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YO
48. Lock Knob If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door NOTE The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on each of the front For personal security and safety in the event of an door trim panels Use this switch to lock or unlock the accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as doors and liftgate well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 1 Unlock 2 Lock 021807371 Power Door Lock Switch Location 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you fro
49. Lubrication DOO door aede ERA KEER AAR en 471 Lunoe el ex 4 9 a xo ER es 218 Lumbar SUpport ues so XU Ee RR EE Rd 144 Maintenance Free Battery yak 9 4 6o SCR 468 Maintenance Procedures leen 463 Maintenance Schedule 508 Maintenance General eee 463 Maintenance Sunroof 197 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 228 461 Manual Transmission Lubricant Selechon aces auo er dex Rmo Sen 506 Manual Service 22 2d 3x99 mea ad Parks 529 Marker Lights Side sexe xe are e ores 502 Master Cylinder Brakes wa cas eue aea 481 Memory Feature Memory Seat 151 WIGCIIORY Seal ea Vues rre vans dees Yee cee es 151 Memory Seats and Radio s ues 3 BES SR ER 151 Men DOl PEL 402 Mipi Hip Computer 22s x sachs RR MEE ttai 246 WHITOLG ca P 99 Automatic DIAS sheet EERS iiras 100 Plech Powered ucarsr acd dence RD RED RR 101 EIGCEDIC KemOte EN et OES BRAAK BERE 101 als io ES ET AE eben PER cee Outside Rearview 546 INDEX NEE Id is ART EL EET EET SETEL 102 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System ses sees 391 Mopar Eats cus ke sense PPESET IEEE 463 528 INI DE BIDE ass 2s bee A ER ER bou ppi 402 Multi Function Control Lever 158 New Vehicle Break In Period 88 Occupant Restraiits 2 scu e apad t de N a e 42 Occupant Restraints Sedan vae ss ud 4 ota as 64 Octane Ratin
50. PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Pis 051210699 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range N STARTING AND OPERATING 327 PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels t
51. VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it trol or Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could
52. Wheels OFF 2WD Models AWD Models the Ground See instructions in Recreational Tow If transmission is operable ing under Starting and Operating Flat Tow e Transmission in NEUTRAL e Transmission in PARK e 30 mph max speed 48 km h e Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e 15 miles 24 km max distance Tow in forward direction Wheel Lift or Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST ae BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing CAUTION e Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from imprope
53. a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the instru ment cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 395 will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this seguence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to
54. adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while t
55. against unwanted movement Continued fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 329 e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that CAUTION it indicates the PARK position e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift REVERSE lever could result This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into DO NOT race the engine when shifting from REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as stop this can damage the drivetrain NEUTRAL 5 Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated The following i
56. are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Continued Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on Rear Wheels only Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer 390 STARTING AND OPERATING These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unegual rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear shou
57. button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e f the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed e To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or qu
58. cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 CAUTION Afte
59. child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR ma
60. component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC Mopar 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally
61. cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To install the cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the cover housing into either of the left or the right attachment points shown Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Then insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle Next grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attachment posts on both ends of the cover into the notches in the trim panels Then lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 WARNING In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mountin
62. electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the TPMS Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 396 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle 3 Afte
63. est 160 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 tbs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued 380 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can
64. exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue w
65. explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully remove the shift lever override access cover located on the PRNDL bezel 3 Turn the ignition to the ON RUN position without starting the engine engine Off 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 5 Using a screwdriver reach into the opening and press 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position ane ee Oe so 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled dik vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting And Operating section zm 5 Es EST ee Se EES na m Da Ris ara Sen I ps Shift Lever Override Access WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453 Towing Condition
66. first detent and release when you want the window to stop For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e f the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto Up feature To do so perform the following proce dure
67. floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommen
68. following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may Towing Assistance not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance area e Press the amp button to begin e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this
69. for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing e A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle NS TA TING AND OPERATING 433 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button located above the selector switch for one second Neutral Switch 7 After the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL N button 8 After the NEUTRAL N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch 434 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE N turning the engine OFF may be reguired to avoid gear clash 9 Shift the transmission into PARK Release the brake pedal Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle Start the engine Press and hol
70. four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 15 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 When the engine RPM are kept within the 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN green area you are driving the vehicle in a fuel efficient manner Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 16 4WD LOW Indicator If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4WD LOW mode In this mode the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 4 LOW 17 Hill Descent Control Indicator If Equipped The symbol indicates the status of the Hill D gt Descent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 k
71. function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and freguency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield and rear window washers share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be s
72. h h id e dry weather condition be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e Even though the system is designed for users speaking e You can say O letter O for 0 zero in North American English French and Spanish ac e Even though international dialing for most number cents the system may not always work for some combinations is supported some shortcut dialing e When navigating through an automated system such number combinations may not be supported as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be speaking the digit string make sure to say Send compromised with the convertible top down e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance not in motion is recommended e Audio quality is maximized under e It is not recommended to store similar sounding MEER N ET N names in the Uconnect Phonebook 5 low to medi hicl d e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo di d M a cal name recognition rate is optimized when the e low road noise entries are not similar e smooth road surface N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be re
73. heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the Maintaining Your Air Bag System skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye WARNING irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation EN e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could continues see your doctor If these particles settle on our clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in y 5 5 be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de wiring including adding any kind of badges or ployed If you are involved in another collision the air stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the bags will not be in place to protect you upper right side of the instrument panel Do not WARNING modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure WARNING or add aftermarket side steps or running boards Deployed air bags cannot protect you in another Continued collisio
74. hole when the vehicle is in a level position 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Rear axle lubricant should be 0 5 in 11 mm below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturer s recommended lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the lubricant in stalled at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Lubricant changes are not neces sary unless the lubricant becomes contaminated with water Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated with water Sky Slider Top Care Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleaning easier Do not subject the top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and tracks Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the top and inside of the tracks by hand with an alcohol dampened cloth Washing Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth system is preferred CAUTION Avoid pointing a high pressure hand held spray wand directly at the sides of the top as this can damage the seal and force water past the weather strips N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4
75. insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON RUN position NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung ers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
76. is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Remote Key Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Flash Lamp With Lock When on is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with Lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Headlamps With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When on is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on If the headlights were turned on by this feature they will also turn off when the wipers are turned off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights i
77. lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone e Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the EVIC 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION WARNING e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable e Drivers must be careful when backing up even to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an o
78. moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 045607535 Manual Temperature Control The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Blower Control 045607539 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Control 045607540 Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cool
79. off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEDIA CENTER 230 REG AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate pene mpm t RSS EA EI r DISC MP3 WMA 042040029 Media Center 230 REQ Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selecti
80. or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator 366 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes Depending upon model and mode of operation the ESC system has up to three operating modes ESC On Partial Off and Full Off ESC On Two Wheel Dr
81. or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate open the liftgate flip up window or activate the PANIC alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system However the line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects when using the RKE transmitter NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis ables all buttons on the RKE transmitter NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 020207279 Vehicle Key To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illumi nated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors and
82. pointing The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position following an adjustment NOTE For vehicles eguipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to return the power mirrors to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Models Without Express Window Feature Press the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light 030407295 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor UNDERSTANDING
83. say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you t
84. select the number and then push to select N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and F
85. sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo ie the GVWR and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information 418 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id When Towing Trailers With Gross Trailer Weight GTW Between 3 500 Lbs 1 588 kg And 5 000 Lbs 2 268 kg The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine transmission combinations ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch Engine Model Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note Transmission BL 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 Ibs 227 kg Automatic w Trailer Tow Package 3 7L 64 sq ft 5 94 sq m 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic w Trailer Tow package Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo ie the GVWR and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 419 Trailer And Tongue Weight
86. the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position mum SS Peg This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front si J v a passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether 7 7 peel iun the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The dors 819 seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Advanced Front Air Bags Curtains SABIC Label Location NOTE This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC that run the entire length of the headliner to protect the driver and passengers in the first and second row sitting next to a window e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Air Bag System Components e Front and Side Impact Sensors Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch system components and Seat Track Position Sensors e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
87. the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following re
88. the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Q7 Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EEE NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary For information on operating the Rear Defrost refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the sys tem will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode ma
89. the liftgate on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic
90. the radio is on ECO if the EVIC display is not already displaying this screen NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The ECO message will display below the outside tem perature in the EVIC display if the audio system is on the ECO indicator will override the audio information display line if the Display Fuel Saver personal setting is ON see Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calib
91. the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune
92. the wrench clockwise until the top closes completely The left motor facing forward will close the top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle The right motor will close the top when it is open from the front of the vehicle Anti Pinch Protect Feature The Sky Slider will retract automatically if it detects an obstruction while closing If this occurs remove the obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky Slider WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the Sky Slider is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the Sky Slider before closing Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the Sky Slider in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the Sky Slider open adjust the Sky Slider opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sky Slider Maintenance Refer to Sky Slider Top Care in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet This power outlet is located on t
93. to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can ca
94. to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 526 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center PO Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexic
95. to select the desired delay In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch interval and allow the wipers to return to the Park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 031507503 Front Wiper Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired for a maximum of 10 seconds If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and t
96. to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair
97. which tire s is are low with a single chime NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 e Service TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting And Operating e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating for more details e Service Park Assist System with a single chime e Oil Change Required with a single chime e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the SELECT button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start
98. which could cause serious injury or death The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa tion The parking brake must remain engaged unless the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled See your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc 456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and Internal damage to the transmission or transfer the opposite end on a towing dolly case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe damage to the transmission and or transfer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed instructions MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICL
99. 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 377 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX l
100. 3 30 Ei Manual Door Locks ies ua 13 DER Rd 30 O Power Door Locks ss SS SS ss 31 0 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOON sareret EUR RA BORD HOEDER RN HORROR DD M ie ARE RE OE 344 35 El Power Windows is se EERDER SE DAE x Koa oD E Vind BUCH 223 9 teriris hp tikai 39 N Liftgate Li Litteate Flipper Glass sins eaten cece SR ll Occupant Restraints O Lap Shoulder Belts O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure O Seat Belt Lock Out O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions o Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped O Energy Management Feature O Seat Belt Pretensioner D Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR D Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women po Moaie Tips 840325545 4545 EE eee 88 Seal Belt Extender osr vise ae Does a ED EE 59 E Transporting Passengers see soe m icem es 88 O Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air HE OUE GAS MM ET 89 P Dass RR ELE TR EE TOET ET 60 4 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The O Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 65 bill 90 D Event Data Recorder EDR 77 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make S Child Restraints 6 6 eee gg ie EL aa a N Engine Break In Recommendations 88 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The author
101. 64 IE EE SR eich ae ara di O Windshield Wiper Operation 165 Es DE CU DUO eere i O Intermittent Wiper System 166 O Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 161 ET Washer O Lights On Reminder ie dace nda mes 161 N ke nee nen eg n N EEDDER Geen awe REED ie O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 168 EL THERE OROS vs sop oon 339 2S eS ee PES 162 4 Headlights With Wipers Available With ish Low Beam Switch iss or eek ce oe 9 162 Automatic Headlights Only 170 E Hase T6 es RENE HE EE P oe as 162 W Tilt Steering Column uou ox eio Ad es 170 O Instrument Panel Dimmer 163 W Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 172 E Map Reading Lights iss ca 029444 oe 163 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 173 ACHO LIONE soas tiendra es SR BERE 164 Bes er 2 idw EET EE xS e d are d 174 O Battery Saver Feat asse ed aes 164 Ho Set A Desired Speed si vaa GEE KERE 174 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id El IO DESCHVOlG sein SERE RS ES au RES 174 EL Io Resume Speed aac da sque Bi web HD HER Hd 175 o To Vary The Speed Setting 175 o To Accelerate For Passing 175 W Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 176 E Parksense Sensors a 6450245445544 25 5 177 O Parksense Warning Display 177 O Parksense Display a Sa sur shea PER DE 178 O Enabling And Disabling Parksense 181 O Service The Parksense Rear Par
102. 7 10 Amp Ignition Switch Red X Wireless Control ame Shutdown Module tisse umn Lock If Equipped j uL ee 2 20 Amp Fuel Pump Diesel M20 15 Amp Interior Lighting Yellow Lift Pump If Blue Steering Wheel Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 Amp Powertrain Control 10 Amp Park Assist Module Red Module Red If Equipped Climate 29 M32 Control System Mod ule If Equipped Compass Module If Equipped Cabin Heater If 10 Amp Occupant Classifica Red tion Module Equipped Diesel Rad 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module Blue If Equipped Power Folding Mirror If Re Oase Fan If Eguipped 20 Amp Back Up Lights 15 Amp Heated Mirrors If Blue Equipped Yellow 10 Amp Airbag Module ea Red 10 Amp Powertrain Control Red Module M33 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse M37 10 Amp Antilock Brakes Red Stability Control Sys tem Module Stop Light Switch Fuel Pump Rela 25 Amp Door and Liftgate Natural Lock Unlock Motors CAUTION e When installing the Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure Continued CAUTIO
103. 87 General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles If Hand Washing Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top Wash the top with a soft natural bristle scrub brush and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing soap Do not use detergent Scrub in all directions covering an area of about two square feet at a time Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces e Allow the top to dry before opening Vacuuming the top with a wet dry shop vacuum will decrease the tops drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in the material e Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stub born stains If stains persist contact your local autho rized dealership for further suggestions CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain silicones organic sol vents petroleum distillates or plasticizers Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening it Additional Cleaning Procedure For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains apply MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id equivalent to the complete stain extending 2 in 50 mm beyond the stain With a soft brist
104. 9 STARTING AND OPERATING 401 FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfabe line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle 402 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air q
105. A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 508 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your e
106. ARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydr
107. AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 e f your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to the AUTO position In manual mode there are six blower speeds that can be individual selected In off posi tion the blower will shut off 045633296 Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control The system will Air Temperature Control Air Re
108. Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 420 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do nottow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engi
109. BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 5 Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESC This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Control ESC These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Two additional electronic brake control system options are Hill Descent Control HDC and Trailer Sway Control TSC Your vehicle may be equipped with one or both of these options Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve hicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize t
110. Bag is turned off and will not inflate NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint refer to Child Restraints WARNINCG Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD System Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Relatively Light Objects Empty or Very Light Objects FF Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occupant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improp erly classified Ensure that the front passenger seatback does not touch anything placed on the second row of seats because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down
111. C RR C Ee 466 Scu A CP PC 436 DUG 2 74 SERRE VD A ER AD ON 921 Temperature Gauge is esa doe EE eee d rates 23 Erie me Cu VISCOS a 9 dh ESO opus epee ERE ES 466 Fneine Oil Viscosity Chatt soos ez ES 466 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 74 Entry System Illuminated 4 3 05 dod DI HERE SER 20 Ede ie AR cac oooh eee eae ee eee ERA 402 Event Data Recorder 4 4 5222 2204s 77 Exhaust Gas Caution SS SS 89 405 EXIdHSE Eis leid 4 45 5 soas de Ed RAAS oi 89 472 Exterior Finish Care SS SS SS 489 EXIGHOEDISDS tcc cevaeediquese ee deen os Di 9 Labbe Gate 24 soc irene AE PS HER err Be 492 Filters Air Cleaner 0 0 0 00 ees 467 Air Conditioning yu 6504454444585 314 470 Eise Oil asses ERA LAE N REED eas 466 505 Encine Oil Disposal tus EES VER riii 466 Finish Cafe 2439224338 x09 5 dE ARES 489 Flash To Pass eee 162 540 INDEX NEE Id Flashers Hazard Waning 55645404 RR 4a DEE HS 436 Turm ional wuerde gs 92 162 229 502 503 Flipper Glass Liftgate se eee RE netii 41 Hooded Engine Starting 3 5 4 vehere ages 322 Floor Console i 2aecek oe EE REOR REX 208 Pied PREIE E DEE sere ses a Gus 504 Fluid Leaks 23222244 6656405044462 IE 92 Fluid Level Checks o s zac sem aco domm rs 484 485 Automatic Transmission 482 Bike TCR AO OE OE T ILI 481 COON GD cri Lr 475 eran Od sudgiaggtsew ug ot e EE ER 464 ower loots is qo ye id DER AE RR Rd 352 Fluid Brake
112. CM communicates with the ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be turned off It also determines the rate of air bag inflation during a collision e Weight Sensors Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM e Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD Indicator Light The PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is turned off The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate during a collision requiring air bag deployment When the right front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger air bag will not inflate even though the PAD indicator light is not illuminated eG Indicator Light Location N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen ger seat In this case the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requires an air bag deployment For all other occupants the PAD indicator light will be illuminated indicating that the passenger Advanced Front Air
113. DEX NEE Id PDC Your Brakes s 2DE ERAS RARR se aaa 993 902 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 900 008 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 477 POMC EC soes pee arx RR Sopa Ren dos en dos 406 Additives Tuel uada suited Sot datar orca gh 404 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 467 Air Conditioner Maintenance 469 AF CONCINOMING uade ipee mede PREEK DRR 303 Air Conditioning Controls sister ee HD Ad EE 303 Air Conditioning Fiter spacc sss ses N gone a 314 470 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 469 470 Air Conditioning System 303 307 469 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 915 Air Fillet E T 467 Air Pressure Tires 00000000 ee 380 ADUD 444 oa bee MET EIER AE EE 60 Aitbas Deployment iusso apt BEE WEER HEM DE 7A ADIP Light esse 834449554 DiE anes 67 76 90 241 Airbag MOIHIGNADIGO ss 22620444 REED teens ss 75 Airbag Window Side Curtain 64 Alarm Security Alafm iss n ee as 9 ER 18 240 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alarm Pane 2s uc Ux 48 ahah ob Rene RR S 24 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 272 297 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 355 358 Anti Lock Warning Light siens sies ARE ROES 291 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 ANG NEN ster acon dido macies poires rud eon ee 240 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 332 we Ene e erm 476 504
114. DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter
115. DVD 20 Amp Frt Rr Axle Lockers Hands Free Module Yellow If Equipped Radio Antenna Uni 10 Amp Trailer Tow If ys cg Opener If Red Eguipped i Equipped Vanity 25 Amp Power Inverter If Light Natural Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 11 10 Amp Climate Control Sys M15 20 Amp Instrument Cluster Red tem If Equipped Yellow Rear View Mirror 12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier If Tire Pressure Green Equiv ped Monitor Transfer Case Module If oe Equipped Glow 20 Amp Instrument Cluster Yellow Wireless Control Pie EES ed Module D Multifunction Control EIER 10 Amp Airbag Module Switch Siren If Red Equipped M17 15 Amp Exterior Lighting 20 Amp Trailer Tow Export Blue Left Front Park and Yellow Only If Equipped Side Marker Left Tail and Running License Lights 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ed Cartridge Mini es Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse kid 15 Amp Exterior Nol M22 10 Amp Right Horn Hi Low Blue Right Front Park and Red Side Marker Right M23 10 Amp Left Horn Hi Low Tail and Running Red Lights 25 Amp Rear Wiper If 25 Amp Automatic Fro r Natural Eguipped Natural Switches If M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch Equipped Switch Red i Driver Window Bank Steering Col Switch umn Module If Equipped M2
116. E CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 3 7L 459 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 460 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 460 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance L EDOTONIS s X oe Pear dca acce aod dos DERE ear d 461 W Replacement Parts sie pes RET v 463 W Dealer Service si EE es se 463 Bl Maintenance Procedures 463 BEREID si 392 RO ees MED AA VER 464 E Engine QU PHEGE san 2 oec doe erg BE N 466 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter vase hx Rh 467 O Mamtenauce Free Battery vivas da Ras 468 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 469 D A C Air Filter If Equipped A Body EL EO 2x ERGE RAAR ERES o Windshield Wiper Blades 471 D Adding Washer Fluid ues euo Rs 472 HExhaust5ystell 2454 9 9 4235 pees 35 472 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME ECoblne System io ewemde29kece RO EWe ES 475 W Bulb Replacement esses 501 Elri es leid soes dotes ees qua OP He p DR d 480 die dle ace swa EE MEER Ree p p Y s 501 O Automatic Transmission 4 3 edicere ates 482 O Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker su lonziig Cabe EM ID 484 Ml E a E Front Rear Axle Fluid ssa ane cane SPR 485 i eee 206 E ky older JOD Cale 6444445 qc PERS 486 E d DAMN Gee Gee EER ET ed ees Paw 903 ae i le a B Fluid Capacities 20 0 0 e cece eee eee 504 aie AE EE SE RE coe eo Oo 488 UTIMS 494 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 505 H Totally Integrated Power Module
117. ERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Opening the Sky Slider when damp wet or Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries dirty can cause stains mildew and damage to the soft top material and the inside of your vehicle Make sure the Sky Slider is dry before opening Always close the Sky Slider when leaving your vehicle damage to the vehicle interior can occur Do not leave the Sky Slider open for several weeks at a time Close it occasionally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the creases to smooth out This is especially im portant if the Sky Slider was opened when not completely dry that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with the Sky Slider open Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Before operating the Sky Slider make sure that no moving parts of the Sky Slider can injure a person or animal Never place any extremities hands feet etc near the Sky Slider components or the roof area while operating the Sky Slider Continued 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slider in Automatic Mode press and release the switch immediately to interrupt the op
118. Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle ParkSense Warning Display 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status Park Assist Off The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone Park Assist ON As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Slow Tone Fast Tone 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Continuous Tone 032809219 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Peel De
119. F YOUR VEHICLE 105 The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re mem
120. G 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The awdliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the de
121. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the Se button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e fully closed windows e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 8007 must u di h m JJ 44
122. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call
123. HSA is disabled 9 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1 mph 1 5 km h 3 mph 45 km h DRIVE 7 5 mph 12 km h REVERSE 1 mph 1 5 km h NEUTRAL 3 mph 4 5 km h However the driver can override HDC operation by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the 364 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id HDC control speed If more speed is desired during HDC The Hill Descent button is located in the lower switch control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed bank below the climate control in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed NOTE HDC is available on vehicles equipped with the MP1522 transfer case e The transfer case must be in 4WD LOW range to enable HDC e HDC is enabled only when the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light in the instrument cluster is on solid e HDC will NOT activate when the automatic tra
124. If Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time Continued to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in the cargo compartment behind a trim cover on the left rear trim panel The latch is located at the bottom of the 729 trim cover Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut located in the rear cargo area inside the vehicle Use the lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439 CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can damage the wi
125. In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 0 Canal ats oe ko A wee oh Se DR MRXCAN3MF9 2546A C4N3MF
126. M 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 517 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing O C O O O L G C L L LI L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authori
127. M Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geog
128. N Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Carpo Lampe Ses EEUE DER OO neies TL212 2 Overhead Console Lamp PLW214 2A Reading Lamp sos GEEET REEDE eee WL212 2 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Headly paws saad ae et fo N ee 9008 H13 Front Park Turn Signal Lamp 3757AK Front Side Marker Lamp va sis op RR ino eS me us 168 Back Up Lamp 42 4 se 4 8 Gad ore 303 RR RE ending 3157K Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED serviced at an authorized dealer lol UP pet ey ak eos bow eee oe wea H10 9145 License Plate Lamp os oie ae ep ay bo ie ae En 168 Rear dal OP 2 6 hak ak ok dep ed Qe dS 3157K Rear Turn Signal Lamp 2 ae se acies Rp ee 3757AK BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the headlamp bulb lock ring 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring and rotate it counterclock wise to unlock it 4 Remove the bulb and connector assembly from the headlamp housing 5 Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and then connect the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch
129. N RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 SS LEKE ED This indicator shows that the high beam head Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause lights are on Pull the multifunction control lever damage to the engine control system It also could on the left side of the steering column toward you to affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is switch to low beam flashing severe catalytic converter damage and 8 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped power loss will soon occur Immediate service is a ef This indicator will illuminate when the front fog required D lights are on WARNING sg PP eee omerer f WARNING Shows the vehicle speed in Miles Per Hour MPH or A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced kilometers per hour km h above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 10 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash wi
130. NG It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 413 Trailer Sway Control Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer a
131. NT PANEL NN additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton
132. ONTROL DNE RAME t gp qw v AK e wae ut fi HAUL ra vnitot BATTERY HEATED anto anode SEAT BELT aun DOO lr M us a Vi Eme p TEE i HALL CAU Ni ROET TERIER AHCHOS S7 E u 9 00 Cu uu LOW abah PLIG POWER SLiDIAG DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTEN AND TETHER FOR ECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL ATEUENO FLUID OMAN RELEASE HAMME CELDREN RATE purTONM DirvE tO C B E SRS x A um m k r AIC AIRBAG rvs LA N 2 PUSH TE BALAN TRANS EINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PABLERGER DOC ALIAS DOGNVERTISILE CDHVERTIELE SEE OVERS AR ELECTI Bo ATOR LHGHT BL TEME TEMPESATUSS RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIAG OFF TOF DERMH TOP UF MA MAR CCF CUOMWIHTIONER STABILITY 010533317 cuowrmoL OFF INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind shield This number also is stamped into the right front Vehicle Identification Number door sill under the molding and appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the ti
133. OUR VEHICLE 137 Continue to continue recording e Switch to system setup Delete to delete the recording e Change to setup e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos e Main menu setup or Se Aig dk oe may res e s e wich to sep EE proceed by saying one of the following commands In this mode you may say the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo e Language English Next to play the next memo e Language French Previous to play the previous memo e Language Spanish Delete to delete a memo e Tutorial e Delete All to delete all memos e Voice Training Setup NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice To switch to system setup you may say on of the Command us button first and wait for the beep before following speaking the Barge In commands e Change to setup 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running
134. OUR VEHICLE NN Id through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate 1 To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e If the belt still c
135. On vehicles equipped with Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for details Resetting the Trip Odometer Display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approxi mately two seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom eter 26 4WD Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Selec Trac II This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the full time four wheel drive auto mode In this mode the system operates with a normal 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id torque split of 42 front axle and 58 rear axle It can redirect up to 10076 of torque to the front or rear axle if necessary 27 Odometer DisplaylTrip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven The trip odometer shows indi vidual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must
136. PolisbI g s is ra s0 EE ere nh 489 Wheel and Wheel TTI sisses ER dep Y ms 491 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care Lens 491 Wind Bulletins sa vio adc 4 a etinm e 39 197 202 do OPEIS vies SERE RES ER GEURE AE 314 lnc Mcr 35 PONCE 30 Sese d dari e HEER EA PAR gs 90 Windshield Defroster 91 305 311 Windshield Washers 164 167 472 PII 24446 bho eee B doxes ae ey E OECD RR 8 472 Windshield Wiper Blades usa s e are te EE ws 471 Windshield Wipers s sm ex ede oo Awe OER E 164 Wipert Blade Replacement uu sues dw eg Pu s rp ar 471 WIDE DCA RP 166 loc PPP Pacis 6 oe R 216 Wipers INtCIMMUIENE osse 9 4 oh oe ee BARE A 166 Wipers Rai Sensitive ecaa sones SE oo ee as 168 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT opecial design considerations are incorporated into this vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Mag
137. R INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Voice Command System Radio If Eguipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To ex
138. RUMENT PANEL 223 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio W Steering Wheel Audio Controls 301 Sales Code RES RSC SS SS SS ss 284 READ Opera aa erts vacet Re rre EN 301 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 285 OCD Player ees 302 reece Ven i Bd d 990 Mi CD DVD Disc Maintenance 302 7 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 293 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 4 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 295 W Climate Controls Mi as ER EROR Ren d D Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 295 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 303 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If d HE CODO Je adt 307 Equipped isses ee 296 n qutt usui Spi sspe quise dins Operating TIS 2 4 3 3 2649 9 4 sey RR HR Dis 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 022632706 1 Air Outlet 4 Radio 7 Power Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 5 Glove Compartment 8 Lower Switch Bank 3 Storage Tray 6 Climate Control 9 Storage Bin if equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 ense TA E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 210651 LERE TE A E MPH jo Nt 40 80 100 99 OO 5 60 P R N D 8 CRUISE 4WD E 040307646 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in
139. Remote Keyless Entry i i or m Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry iu 034452449 RR ks Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE Tread Wear Indicators exse eet ELE OU Tap OHUOONIBIGE 29 9299 ERAS EVA POSTE Trip Odometer Reset Button sie sans ems 334 JOD Signals soe SEERDE EE 158 162 229 502 503 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 103 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 531 Universal Transmitter SS ss ss se 185 Unleaded Gasoline less 401 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 51 Upholstery Care d aezenprbrese ae te RE PD 492 Vanity MIMOS Pn 102 Variance COMPASS s cser sasaa oe RE EE d 248 Vehicle Certification Label 408 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vemde Loading see RR di HE RES 376 408 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Nelle DIONISS pag d doce x VERE KALK RO bangs 313 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Viscosity Engine Oil Voice Recognition System VR 554 INDEX NEE Id Warning Flasher Hazard soe se tese Rees sah 436 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 226 Warne Roll Over sis eers i e doppie d Hie do Eas 4 Warnings and Cautions 3 sasie ce d ven Rb ds 7 Warranty Information iae RUS RED DERE NE 528 Washers Windshield 164 167 472 Water Divine TROUPE oe esce mE ESPTATE SES 346 Waxing and
140. S 352 Pakne Ow EI eo rie Oe ta oa 4 gee a RE 352 assi ICN gas oe varia spe Piae ees oa P uci ere 162 Personal Ser HE acto oe raa ERE JR E AAR e 201 POS P 67 Petey Ma DONE uu seg RA e XU d ese 87 Phone Cellular eee 103 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 103 Placard Tire and Loading Information 375 Polishing and Waxing go 4 0 4245 48 04 a2 oe oe Gs 489 Power Poor Lid geresne qr KERKE EE EE 31 Ml ets uo gan fa eGie ade Ge P dE eee 101 voc A ET 138 Dieet E ads bas ERA EED RED ae eae 951 952 GUI ODE 24 559 65445 25 ETIA BOO ERA 195 b nroof 5kv Slider xs RR vedas 198 486 lano A um 35 Power Steering Fluid seen OOR eci yee KERE 506 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 5d Preparation fOr Jacking icu ee oq P ean t DE BOK 440 Pretensioners eat Del P asta wt ng a ee Br ae a a 54 Programmable Electronic Features 291 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 20 Radial Ply ICS uus Eod dee IOTER TERT HER Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 548 INDEX NEE Id Radio Operation Rain Sensitive Wiper System Rear Axle Differential Rear Park Sense System Rear Seat Folding Rear Window Defroster Rear Window Features Rear Wiper Washer Rearview Mirrors Reclining Front Seats Recorder Event Data Recreational Towing Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N Reformulated Gasoline Refrigera
141. STRUMENT PANEL This system conveniently allows the driver to select a The system allows the driver to select information by variety of useful information by pressing the switches pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the wheel following e Compass Heading N 5 E W NE NW SE SW e Outside Temperature F or C e Audio Information ECO Display e Fuel Economy e Miles kilometers To Empty e Tire Pressure Status if equipped e Timer 041035449 e Display Units Selection EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons e System Warnings Door Ajar etc e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features MENU Button Press and release the MENU button to advance MENU the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu features Upon reaching the last item in the Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button press and release DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button when prompted by the EVIC to step through stored system warning message or Personal Settings features SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button when prompted by the EVIC to reset features with a reset capability or to change Personal Settings UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 COMPASS Button Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature when the current scr
142. Slider must close fully before opening it from the opposite end Using Operator Mode Press the switch rearward and hold it the Sky Slider will open from the front and move toward the rear of the vehicle Press the switch forward and hold it the Sky Slider will open from the rear and move toward the front of the vehicle NOTE During operation any movement of the Sky Slider switch will stop the Sky Slider roof Closing The Sky Slider Using Automatic Mode Press and release the button in the center of the switch and the Sky Slider will close automatically from any position 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using Operator Mode If the Sky Slider is open from the front press the switch forward and hold it the Sky Slider will move forward Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider travel at any point If the Sky Slider is open from the rear press the switch rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider will move rearward Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider travel at any point Manual Override The Sky Slider drive motors are mounted to the roof above the cargo lamp In the event that your vehicle losses battery power you can close the Sky Slider by turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a 6 mm Allen wrench To do so you must first remove the cargo lamp from the headliner Then insert the wrench into the Allen shaped hole in the appropriate motor and turn
143. System VES TM If Equipped Refer to Video Entertainment System VES TV for fur ther details Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id radio system
144. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a do
145. Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files T
146. UR VEHICLE M Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information SKY SLIDER FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF IF EQUIPPED The Sky Slider is a full length soft top power roof that opens front to rear or rear to front Sky Slider Usage Precautions NOTE e The system will not operate when ambient tempera ture is at 4 F 20 C or lower e The system will not operate at vehicle speeds of 86 mph 138 km h or above e Opening and closing the Sky Slider repeatedly with out the engine running may run the battery down CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the Sky Slider vehicle contents and the vehicle interior e Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slider when it is frozen Wait until the Sky Slider is thawed before operating Continued N UND
147. Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn With Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed i e func tional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressin
148. Where are you I need more direction 1 2 9 9 6 8 J LOL Why I love you Call me Call me later 10 Thanks 11 See You in 15 minutes 12 I am on my way N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 13 TIl be late 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages Are you there yet Where are we meeting Can this wait Bye for now When can we meet Send number to call Start without me e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing gency English Uconnect Francais Last See Enter Enter Number See Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages Messages i Flowc
149. YOUR VEHICLE ME LIFTGATE NOTE Use the power door LOCK switch on either front To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE lift transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate The manual door locks on the doors and the driver s door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle 022205927 Liftgate Release N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Liftgate Flipper Glass NOTE To prevent accidental damage the Liftgate Flip The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the per Glass will not open if the liftgate is ajar Make sure the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push upon liftgate is fully closed when attempting to open the the window switch located on the liftgate Flipper Glass WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass may automatically rise NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel 022207207 Liftgate Flipper Glass Release 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e Su
150. a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm To Unlatch The Liftgate Flipper Glass Press the FLIPPER GLASS button twice to unlatch the liftgate flipper glass WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise Using The Panic Alarm NOTE The PANIC and Security Alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the PANIC and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To turn the PANIC Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the PANIC Alarm is on the headlights and turn signal lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the illuminated entry system will turn on The PANIC Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 During the PANIC Mode the door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE system will function normally PANIC mode will not disarm the Security System on vehicles so equipped NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the PANIC Alarm due to the radio frequency nois
151. a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infan
152. aded latches that retain the storage bin cover to the cargo load floor should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Flip the spring loaded latch pull loops up 035432016 Cargo Load Floor Loops 2 Pull the loops upward and twist them one quarter turn so that they are parallel to the slots in the storage bin cover 3 Lift the cover upward over the loops 4 Turn over the cover and reinstall it N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 NOTE You can install the cover with either side facing Cargo Tie Down Hooks And Loops upward The tie downs located on cargo area floor should be used 5 With the cover seated in the floor pull upward on Eed ie AA D IE loops and twist them one guarter turn so that they are no longer parallel to the slots in the cover 6 Flip the loops down WARNING A loose storage bin cover thrown forward in a acci dent or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always latch the storage bin cover to the cargo load floor with the spring loaded latches when not accessing the storage bin Cargo Tie Down Hooks 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e Cargo tie downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or accident a tie down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers To help protect against personal inju
153. afety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 930 e Seroice Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Owner s Manuals T
154. al for side impact head injuries The SABIC air bags deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the side air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant protection N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any re
155. al components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended Continued fluid Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Sp
156. all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Driver s Power Seat If Equipped The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up or down forward or rearward or to tilt the seat 030932728 Power Seat Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired positio
157. ame size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal 356 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING WARNING Continued e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must their effectiveness and may lead to a collision never be exploited ba reckless OT dangerous Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just manner which could jeopardize the user s safety press firmly on your brake pedal when you need or the safety of others to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys CAUTION ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly in stalled aftermarket radios or telephones The ABS cannot prev
158. an t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 e Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path WARNING WARNING for the strap between the anchor and the child seat preferably between the head restraint posts under An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to neath the head restraint increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts Tether Strap Mounting 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not reguired for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50
159. anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be eguipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly be hind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint For the outboard seating positions route the tether underneath the head restraint and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child r
160. ar plate into the buckle until you hear a click seat belt latch plates are located on the C Pillar for the outboard rear seating positions and next to your arm in the center rear seating position Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap N Latch Plate To Buckle Latch Plate 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to b
161. as 3e ER RRE buses 231 ecd cu REKE OE RR TA EO 24 326 Gear Select Lever Override 45 General Information 17 26 133 401 General Maintenance sn 463 erri nn P 493 Gross Axle Weight Rating iue 95 409 412 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 409 411 GVUR etseGecete ee sags HAS AERODEN 409 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 103 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Walter sassate tence da RR RS P RS 346 Hazard Warning Flasher x cavaeadecegy eevee 436 Head Restainis asses 64 8 saree SUP tore eae 145 CAC Rests na node dei rm 145 LleadlPlis PCT 158 P Uu P DI 159 bulb Replacement iss ex ete shards 501 Sic rr 493 Delay sues aude TURPE P ER OE P EX 160 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 162 Den On Reminder 3 cassa ier REIR 161 On With Wipers 542 INDEX NEE Id PassiN oS visu bEdR SR EER HORE 9 edis 162 Rea M ERNS 501 edel PTT 158 Tune Delay s oss cra pee RUE RUP Rer doe rd s 160 Heated Mirrors a dox 3 2 65 648 x EES ers 102 Heated Seats cee ees 140 Heidi a Sawer ek ous hoe BAERS RR Pa SS 2 Sont 303 Hedler Engine BIOcK eis 28 dh rer 044954 825 High Dean Be OE ay ee spe y xr vt DS ves 229 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 162 Hill Descent Control 26e xs y bees 363 Hill Descent Control Indicator 232 363 Hill Start Assist oie uxo eam DR oo ER 360 Hitches Mailer TOWNE serpi
162. ase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION Do not use 4WD LOW range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement Driveline hardware dam age can result Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess o
163. ason Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemen tal Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example
164. ate at the same speed e The 4WD LOCK position and 4WD LOW position are intended for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driving in these positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components e When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information CAUTION e Do notattempt to make a shift while only the front wheels or rear wheels are spinning The MP1522 Command Trac transfer case is not equipped the 2WD position or WD LOCK position at a given road speed Take care not to over speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h with a synchronizer and therefore the speed of the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front wheels or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Continued Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumfer ence on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear 336 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued e Since four wheel drive provides improved trac e You or others could be injured if y
165. ator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 23 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolan
166. authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change NOTE For best access to the oil filter a drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist 3 7L Only N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleane
167. ave Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp e button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect M Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section P
168. be das BA sd e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names 4 1 TM 1 Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries S The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the e Press the amp button to begin phonebook entries including the downloaded phone e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say book entries if available Phonebook Erase All e To call one of the names in the list press the VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the Pe deleted number designation you wish to call e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be The selected number will be dialed deleted or edited N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you h
169. be in the ON position with the engine either OFF or RUNNING This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position 2WD Or 4WD Auto To 4WD Low When shifting into or out of AWD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or its occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h using the Preferred Procedure or completely stopped using the Alternate Procedure Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow the vehicle speed to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling move the transfer case switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Move the transfer case switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear NOTE Steps 1 and 2 in the Preferred Procedure and the Alternate Procedure are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id process then the indicator light will flash a
170. be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer ECO ea a ee a ee ee Fuel Saver Indicator Off ECO ON iss ees Ese he amp Fuel Saver Indicator On COO CC Door Ajar CALE RR AO EE nee des eee Liftgate Ajar GLASS perk edd os hea te sre Ex Flipper Glass Ajar LOW HCE one ok eee EE OS Low Tire Pressure BASCADP Lua gebe beta heeds es Fuel Cap Fault HOPESE uus xo ARE P ARE OPNS eee Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus ter this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information ECO ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer
171. ber the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the So button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device a
172. bs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 378 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib
173. bstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING Continued GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist that operate devices such as garage door openers motor System it is strongly recommended that the ball ized gates lighting or home security systems The mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle
174. chment Never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System and In stalling Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt for typical installation instructions Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME In addition there are tether strap
175. chnology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Siriu
176. circulation Control A C Operation Set blower knob to Auto Sct mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed Automatic Automatic Automatic User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can bc overridden for 10 minutes at a time Automatic but can be overridden for 10 minutes at a time User selectable outside or recirculated Automatic Automatic User selectable A C on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off 81a12736 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the f
177. cking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if amp equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone amp button and Voice Com mand Sve button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button i Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES O
178. cle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content 416 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow This should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 lbs 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note Transmission DL 4x2 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 lbs 91 kg Automatic OL 4x4 32 sq ft 2 97
179. cle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 6 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id CAUTION Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Lol 060633619 Mounting Spare Tire 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ib 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness
180. clines for additional passenger WARNING comfort Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat to recline the seatback shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio station presets 030932731 Rear Seatback Release Strap 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The memory switch is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column The switch contains a SET button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2 The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of the two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch J d Driver Memory Switch 031107098 Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile perform the following NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory 1 Turn the ignition ON 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror and radio sta
181. com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command vr button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your comma
182. cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time 384 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may loo
183. d Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child re straint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted attach ments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard seating positions only The center seating position will accommodate LATCH compatible lower anchorages with flexible webbing mounted attachments only Regardless of the specific type of lower atta
184. d the brake pedal Release the parking brake Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 436 B If Your Engine Overheats 436 N Jacking And Tire Changing 437 Hi jack IMOCANON ux o 09 9 2758 3990 BR ER EE DAE 438 HS pare Tite 5l0WBPE saam eha se ha d RE 438 El Spare dite Removal x23 e444 ALS EER EES 439 O Preparations For Jacking 440 O Jacking Instructions 00 440 D Road Tire Installation 445 N Jump Starting Procedures O P
185. d then shut down in 10 seconds e For security power window operation and sunroof or Sky Slider operation if equipped is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote otart request 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if eguipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock knob on each door trim panel upward cn Manual
186. d vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal p vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an au
187. damage Continued 430 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION Continued Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar recreational towing CAUTION on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that Shifting Into NEUTRAL N the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal WARNING parts You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging mE the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N 2 Turn OFF the ignition position disengages both the front and rear drive 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle do not start the engine to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the 4 Press and hold the brake pedal driver is not in the vehicle 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission to PARK eee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object 7 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N comes on release the NEUTRAL N button button located above the selector swi
188. ded because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be guickly re moved by tuming the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter
189. down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly To Lower The Rear Seat 1 Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of each rear seatback 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed 2 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle Rear Seat Release Strap 3 Fold the rear seat completely forward 4 If desired push down on the seatback to lock it in the folded position To Raise The Rear Seat NOTE If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position 1 If locked in the folded position pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle 2 Raise the seatback and lock it into place WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Recliner Adjustment The rear seatback also re
190. drive vehicles de as required pends on tires of equal size type and circumfer ence on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and the brake master cylinder add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation Required Maintenance Intervals At Each Oil Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals e Change the engine oil filter c rnr cormireco0 mcozo zm z z hj Inspect the brake hoses and lines N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 511 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension
191. duced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message Press the amp t button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the VR button while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to List of Preset Messages Yes No
192. dure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized P dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This wi
193. e warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Four Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the
194. e your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc NS TA TING AND OPERATING 429 CAUTION CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used the driveshaft is connected will cause severe trans Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Tow only in a forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the mission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War ranty Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models transfer case The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL N and The transmission must be placed in PARK for the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational recreational towing towing The NEUTRAL N selection button is adjacent to Before recreational towing perform the procedure the transfer case selector switch Shifts into and out of outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL N to transfer case NEUTRAL N can take place with the iab be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU selector switch in any mode position TRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result Failure to follow these procedures can cause se vere transmission and or transfer case
195. e Air Bag Warning Light Front Passenger e Steering Wheel and Column e Occupant Classification System OCS e nstrument Panel e Occupant Classification Module OCM e Knee Impact Bolster e Passenger Air Bag Disable PAD Indicator Light e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag e Weight Sensors e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact Sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions NOTE The passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may not deploy even when the driver Advanced Front Air Bag has if the Occupant Classification System refer to Oc cupant Classification System has determined the pas senger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child size category This could be a child teenager or even an adult WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if t
196. e Control System Electronic 357 Brake EDU 262225462548 SERE ARE AE EA 506 Diane OV Stell us does oq EER RAY DEERE HE HEDE 480 Anti Lock ABS aus Sore trad ar dics 355 358 Ehud CREK dese Vi Me de vore OE denn teu 481 506 Master t diie AR ARE EO RR KOS 481 isi nm 902 Wamung Light EE CR deu SOR Roe d tiaki 239 Drake Pore ocetceeneavaneeeuc p A mea Ed 902 Brake Transmission Interlock 32b EE 2448 N EED 45635 6 Per ETE 480 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 88 Bulb Replacement 536 INDEX NEE Id BUSS EISE vs 22725 5299 ERAS OE oss es 92 500 Calibration Compass ac p a cet dod hope deco dr SS 248 Capacities Fd osos 9o he den EO d mos don ie d 504 Caps Filler PUCL 406 OES ME 2 45 orn Rose PER PRA e ds 466 Power SICCIING 444624262 ode LAER 445454 352 Radiator Coolant Pressure 478 Cat Washes pa EG Ad MEE oe ae OR N RE 489 Carbon Monoxide Warning 89 405 Cargo Vehicle Loading sss AAR BREAK SO 408 Ca roAa COVER sussa RR cues Rok HR ETE 213 Carco Area Festures uus 29x RR EN PACA RED 209 Cargo Compartment s 25545 be PRED ee NC 209 Inr PC vm 164 dcc iu PP 164 Cargo Load FOOF OER EER LARR DR Ge 8 209 Careo lie Dow acres REK RARR BERDE NEE es 211 Cellular Phone is se bo ie GEREG RA ado EER 103 303 Certification Label 44232322 99 939 x29 eee 408 Hameo Ed Te ELE EE EE UR eS ea 437 Chari Te SIZING 444 canes Roue ac Rb E 371 Check Engine Lig
197. e as the vehicle is driven This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended 392 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring value Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and For example your vehicle may have a recommended warning have been established for the tire size cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure equipped on your veh
198. e attentive to The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate distance to other vehicles people and objects and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe e The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction operation of the vehicle under all road conditions i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle Your complete attention is always required while backing uphill is in REVERSE gear driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a e The vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is Lini the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward Ee V Pipini A gears The system will not activate if the transmission Towing With HSA is in PARK l ms HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an incline while towing a trailer 362 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when l
199. e head restraint head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head dem Adjustment Button 030907490 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable dan DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event 030907533 of a collision and could result in serious injury or EE Active Head Restraint Tilted death NOTE Continued e The head restraints should only be removed by guali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints reguire removal see your autho rized dealer 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the
200. e nares oes x 348 Traction Downhill ss 6444224448243 eris 349 O After Driving On Road iau KERR ES 349 aM Power Steering see RE SEE UR Rs dol O Power steering Fluid Check eee 352 W Parking Brake ses EE Es es ee 352 W Anti Lock Brake System 955 N Electronic Brake Control System 957 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 358 H Traction Control System TCS 358 oO Brake Assist System BAS 959 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 360 O Hill Start Assist HSA 360 o Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 363 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 365 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 24 9x eme xa 369 B Tire Safety Information 370 O Die Markings esu eee dede yi be N ine E 370 O Tire Identification Number TIN 373 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 374 H Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 3 5 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 319 Bl Tires General Information 379 LL THO PIOSSU ED 2 99 3 3 eo ned bee HD DRA E 379 O Tire Inflation Pressures 380 D Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 382 O Radial Ply ites 2 454 53H ean SEE wars R Ko E 382 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped 382 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 383 oO Full Size Spare If Equipped 384 O Limit
201. e pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent collisions in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannet which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in Full Off mode Refer to Elect
202. e per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC make sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message appears again see an autho rized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift
203. e used together NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too will withdraw any slack in the belt tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed Removing Slack From Belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts
204. e vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC to NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 make your selection press and release the SELECT button Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for system func tion and operating information Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears When OFF is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Display Units In The EVIC can be changed between English and Metric units of measure The units apply to the Outside Tem perature Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Tire Pressure displays To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until U S or METRIC appears Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or
205. e vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To read data recorded by an EDR special eguipment is reguired and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special eguip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces reguire that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even
206. e will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number y
207. ear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming Of The System If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the driver s door lock cylinder 3 Close all doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process If the Vehicle Security Alarm is set successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is armed NOTE For added security whenever the Security Alarm is armed the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped is disabled as well To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or
208. eater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Front Seat Adjustments While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the For models eguipped with manual seats the driver and seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by reached the desired position Then using body pressure using a bar by the front of the seat cushion near the floor move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that s E the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Seat Adjustment Front Seat Manual Recline To recline the seatback lean forward slightly and lift the lever Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever To return the seatback to its normal uprig
209. eaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC refer to Hill Start Assist under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into PARK NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 5 Rotate the steering wheel one half tum to the left 6 Press the ESC Off button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within twenty seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 7 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional one half turn to the right 8 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm
210. ecial Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil fill tube that is sealed and it should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole 1 when the vehicle is in a level position Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that NJ recommended by the manufacturer will require more Q Ooi frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Pn Nie 8 19 C Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintainin 7 i AE d Qf Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper Your Vehicle for further information N M o o I e d O M maintenance intervals la N MERE m In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission
211. ect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate ee 042305232 Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adj
212. ect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 519 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 520 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before J Change the engine oil and engine oil 128 000 miles 208 000 km filter J Replace the engine air cleaner filter L Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of I Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before J Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine 136 000 miles 221 000 km a a Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear imp
213. ed Overdrive fourth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adeguate tem perature e the engine coolant has reached an adeguate tempera ture e vehicle speed is sufficiently high e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator and e the TOW HAUL button has not been activated When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to select TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will downshift into third gear NOTE TOW HAUL mode locks out Overdrive STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Tow Haul Button The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started 334 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Torgue Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torgue converter engages automati ca
214. ed Use Spare If Equipped 384 El Tite Spine 34 fees basta ED tea He 385 O Tread Wear Indicators 4 386 ERS ie MI a ee EE are 386 Hd Replacement Tires ii dees Be PER RR EER RR 387 ME Chains ASE ET eae N 388 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 390 N Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 391 Ease Sys EN wera a e Eod 233 145 DAS es 393 O Premium System If Equipped 396 O General Information N Fuel Requirements O Reformulated Gasoline 402 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 402 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 403 o MMT In Gasoline 223 2924 999w xus 403 O Materials Added To Fuel 404 320 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id El Poel System Cautions 4644546265 EE Hd 404 oO Carbon Monoxide Warnings 405 W Adding Fuel rrr 406 O Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap aua rues sues ds 406 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 408 M Vehicle Loading RR RE 0045 408 EE ed iieatien Label sae ER edd 408 Miles IE aes em d RE REV ERE 411 H3 Common Towing Definitions A11 O Trailer Hitch Classification 415 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 417 o Trailer And Tongue Weight O Towing Requirements O Towing Tips N Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc o Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle O Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models CO Recreational Tow
215. ed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage 350 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your
216. ee a Geen baa VAR ee ee 390 cic gat eee ees mi eee 370 DIES ieke RE RR RU ete eee eee 371 pale JIE PT IE 24 438 PE 54 2 EE Son eee HR RAS AD UN 385 Tread Wear Indicators sies pex Res 366 To Open Hood 22544494 45948 hee 9E IAZTETE 156 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 419 Torque Converter Clutch ic x4999429 RD 334 Tow Taul Indicator Light sees ope RARR s 232 TOWING see Rep os EER EE sete Se A11 452 24 Hour Towing Assistance 117 Disabled VEN sa ris ieee eg ee ges fees 452 Co MS ES EE eh A17 KReclequOnal iese aD AUS HEARD ES 427 ol PI P 417 lowing ASSISTE ciety ccodeeed sae deed YS LN A MACON CORO e ios e sane ett rated he AE DR es 358 TOGHGE TONO sau teas EERS dpa dg P RR E Og 411 Cooling system TIPS s susci ese RR oes 426 Igi ro ie pi aa ease eet DA ee oo 415 Minimum Requirements 52e ER RE RE 420 Trailer and Tongue Weight 419 WINNS S see a heen HE SR RE es AR HARE 423 Trailer Towing Guide id s x PER DE 417 DOG dels lit sei cde RERO SCEZRETC PEE 417 runc LC m 324 N INDEX 553 PUNOMANC 19959959959 9 932599 Operation 22294959 65494654 d P DERS cuc cade PTT TP cu t PMG 2046 yeh on ee nae ae eee ek oF 484 Four Wheel Drive Operation ME inteitdiiEe ras fad RAD BED oa ee OS Hans SO asas 646 AAR EES PE A EISE PUIOMIANG 445 4454 OER SARA Hone ER ERK Idi MP c SE HEY DEL MointenanEe us acea nd oe ee ee gee a Be Transmitter Battery Service
217. een is not the Compass Outside Temp screen Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Low Tire Pressure e Spare Low Pressure e Premium TPMS Graphic Display e Key in Ignition Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Key Fob Battery Low with a single chime Memory 1 2 Profile Set Memory 111 32 Profile Recall Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not in Park with a single chime automatic transmission Memory System Disabled Vehicle in Motion with a single chime manual transmission Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled with a single chime e Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmission Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle in Motion manual transmission Door Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which door is open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Doors Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Gate with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate open and A single chime Low Tire with a graphic of the car showing
218. eering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EGUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leav
219. eight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the Gross Trailer Weight GTW is 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision 412 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNI
220. el wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Dry with a soft cloth Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or w
221. em is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 28 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 29 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 30 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt re
222. empt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD a If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to pr
223. ent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning Continued e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage When descending mountains or hills repeated brak ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos sible Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control e After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ELECTRONIC
224. entes n RE DR ED d des oH 25 415 Holder Coin s xard oe aes 68S Ke ees 208 Holdet CUD suo usw obse ohare PRISE PPS 206 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 185 Hood Release ee 156 ISOM 3309042424599 GEES LESER ED pea 25 4 12 c T 12 lpnition Key Removal 24 cedcesca zsu4rzeuwsesie 12 Winn ated BE osse cedo boe m d e R 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key ds dye Re a bebe aed 14 Infant Restraint ooo oe LEEN RUE RUE TES 78 79 Inflation Pressure Tires sakie same x 380 Information Center Vehicle LL 241 Inside Rearview Mirror eese 99 Instrument Cluster 0 0000 225 226 Instrument Panel and Controls 224 Instrument Panel Cover 004 492 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 493 Integrated Power Module Fuses 494 Interior Appearance Care uade Ee sea sewn 492 Interior ele xs RS uer ESPERA snes bee as 158 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 166 ies elle sie si wwedor da E349 R43 ee AT AE Sq A N INDEX 543 te SE ie 6 eeu b bb OOR TER KT DIE EK 438 Jack Operation Gia se 3 1 908 EE P D DE 437 440 Jacking InstbUet lof scs pas dog DERS RE OER 440 JOOP SUNS OE OE AE AA EE esp E 446 Keyl Reminder sis soo reis d SS og ERA Sn 14 kes LOM ANNE das Anco HE REED eS pi aes 16 Key Replacement 2 244 46 26e5 ee beds eansee 16 Key gentry immobilizer essere Goede EER ears 14 Keyless Entry Syste espe oo dos dor Cade Bem Hd
225. er temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes 045607544 The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through
226. eration If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slider M in Operator Mode release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation Sky Slider Control The Sky Slider switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Do not allow small children to operate the Sky Slider Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the Sky Slider while operating the Sky Slider switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or Sky Slider Switch death NOTE The Sky Slider switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position 034332876 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Opening The Sky Slider Using Automatic Mode Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the Sky Slider will open from the front and move automatically toward the rear of the vehicle Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the Sky Slider will open from the rear and move automatically toward the front of the vehicle NOTE e During operation any movement of the Sky Slider switch will stop the Sky Slider roof e To resume the operation from a partially open posi tion press and release the switch a second time e The Sky Slider will not open from the front and the rear at the same time The Sky
227. es emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply p See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the screw from the RKE transmitter case if equipped 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmit ter case apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal d Separating Case Halves 021432709 3 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together 5 Reinstall and tighten the screw until snug if equipped General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that
228. estraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNINCG Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts in Passenger Seating Positions section The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger ALR Second Row ALR Cinching ALR Latch Plate N A e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING Y
229. ety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Mirrors O Inside Day Night Mirror o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped D Outside Mirrors O Power Mirrors o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped O Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped 99 W Uconnect Phone If Equipped 103 arenrccm rm 105 O Phone Call Features SS SS ss 113 DO Uconnect Phone Features 116 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 120 H Things You Sh
230. f 9 in 22 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting 348 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine transmission axle transfer case to assure they have not been contaminated Con taminated fluids and lubricants milky foamy in appear ance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to AWD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shi
231. f the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This
232. f you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be sea
233. flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming and then flash slowly when the system is armed The light will also turn on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 33 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 34 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Compass Display If Equipped On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster this display shows the compass heading N S E W NE NW SE and SW and the outside temperature ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 041033330 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR IN
234. formation VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN NS TA TING AND OPERATING 409 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheel
235. from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Feature The driver s and front passenger s if equipped for pas senger side power window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the w
236. ft the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 349 speed If the brakes are reguired to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNINCG If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle spe
237. ft to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No proeram type or Foreign Language Language Information Inform NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is News Niewe displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station
238. g Do not store in the vehicle Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Rotate the switch upward to the first detent posi tion for rear wiper operation MH NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to activate the rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is held for a maximum of 10 seconds Upon release the wiper will cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set NOTE The rear wiper and the rear washer will not operate If the liftgate flipper glass is open UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the CAUTION climate control Mode knob Press this button to Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside the heating elements mirrors An indicator in
239. g Gasoline Fuel 401 505 Odometer EED 2rd Re uo HA RE DRA EER POR 299 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 346 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 346 Oil Change Indicator 24644449445 EER Res 238 245 Oil Change Indicator Reset 238 245 id Filter CRIDO E to ER OER AR F DRR GES 466 id Eie 3469644455 eee EMT ET MES 464 505 rui P HE HE EER DR Ak HD 504 Change MIVA ase es p PER oss 238 245 465 CHECKING Pr AO NE 4 464 Bie ia hag ce res EE ET ETE EE ER 464 Be CE 466 Filter ateeebeie e8 rS SIE ES EE 466 505 Filter Disposal sesira ee ohn toad snd sare 466 Identification oe ea vumesduweqeeeu tee 465 Materials Added to 5 sse 466 Recommendation 004 465 504 DODUIGUE suce ESERE a PEE 466 piro A aa EE iy eos ag DE FA 466 504 Onboard Diagnostic System 460 461 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 185 Operating Precautions llle 460 Operator Manual Owner s Manual D Outside Rearview Mirrors ese se se se ri 100 Overdrive 44 ass HERE HERE RR REOR AR en 238 332 N INDEX 547 Overdrive OFF Switch 249a rea ERAT 332 Overheating Engine s 29294 sesona iani 234 436 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 929 Pont Gane ses 4 00 4G EER EE ER 24 99 3 965 488 Pontes xo gu adc ardeo d is tment 3 o6 488 PAC AIT uuo EER EED R4 DRS AAS OE ER SR 24 Park Sense System Reat io oes hee 20006 ERA 176 laris Drake geere ierre penssa SAO RAD TE
240. g system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 Brake Master Cylinder The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is illuminated Be sure to clean the to
241. g the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights With Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening
242. h to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407556 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds before activating the flash to pass function again Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the in
243. hart is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Entries Listed one I Enter Name Enter Name B EE Enter Name 1st Confirmation Enter Location Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined B1c6bf80 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Toggle Confirmation Prompts on off Select Audio Devices SMS Incoming Message Announcement Setup Device ing New phone Select a language will English Espanol temporarily or Francais Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing override phone priorities Select phone lo be deleted Phone Deleted System confirms All Phones Deleted System Lists Phones Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 oice Commands Pri
244. hat you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not att
245. haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING Continued Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be ableto Always make sure that floor mats are properly feel the air directed against the windshield See your attached to the floor mat fasteners authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Never place or install floor mats or other floor inoperable coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them fro
246. he CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in th
247. he folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing te
248. he instru ment panel below the climate controls It has power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position EE WS N f N 034632877 Front Power Outlet Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty 034663424 Power Outlet Fuse Location M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cell
249. he parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Mm 1 Parking Brake STARTING AND OPERATING 353 When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application 354 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front WARNING Continued wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children the load on the transmission locking mechanism may to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The number of reasons A child or others could be parking brake should always be applied whenever the seriou
250. he straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 CAUTION WARNING e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do Cargo must be securely tied down before driving not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sible and secure the load appropriately sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Long loads which extend over the windshield cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features 224 D Compass Display ECO la Instrument Cluster EE ss 225 AE ie MEE H Instrument Cluster Descriptions 226 Spree EL CODER aa enka trae od ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EE tance io ap DE Maas RD 2 EMVIC H Equipped
251. he terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 529 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a s
252. he user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 359 a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or the Full Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brak
253. he vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional These protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that reguire permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potenti
254. hen resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Mist Feature Push downward on the windshield wiper washer con trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031507504 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer control lever to one of the five intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system is adjustable f
255. here speed limits or condi Hons are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be reguired for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original eguipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 383 vehicle If y
256. hese Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 531 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowe
257. hicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C WARNING system adds heat to the engine cooling system and e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the turning the A C off can help remove this heat vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum the road to avoid the danger of being hit when heat the mode control to floor and the blower control operating the jack or changing the wheel to high This allows the heater core to act as a Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You from the engine cooling system could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator
258. ht Malfunction Indicator Light 228 461 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 88 Checks DOlGl V ure sein d ded EERS OER p da 88 Child Restraint ge a4 Gee reve ood us 78 79 83 85 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 82 83 Child del Joel e uic 5 og vi ed one Pare ED ER 99 Clean Air Gasoline eese 402 Cleaning Weels 4444465425 4956 beeen Shee 491 Windshield Wiper Blades 471 Climate Control 4 6 s 226 RARR ES ERA 303 Se 445435 66 EES ooh ee ee eee 258 277 286 Coin Holder 23 42 2 909 hm ER ERROR ES 208 Cold Weather Operation 20152243054 46068045 322 N INDEX 537 Command Trac Operation 24e 2x9 3 9429s 334 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 302 Compact opare LIE 546 044 HR RS age 383 Son hase Not ate SR ee oe een eas eee 246 Compass Calibration ssi a weeded ena Rea N WE 248 Compass Valance reens se ah aren ca RE Es 248 Computer IOP TIAVOl sos a uo dE REOR HS ON 246 Sor MC CC T TET 208 Console Floor oosesdacarvteubeweseacedwes 208 Contract Service SS a 527 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 478 COOMMNG SyStER ses SEER RARR ER deber ees 475 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 477 Coolant Capacity xe au BEER ERENS 504 Coolant Level een 475 479 Disposal of Used Coolant 478 Drain Flush and Refill 476 lS been ooo os 24 pie 6 SU ARRA Ud d ERU Yos 479 Points to Reme
259. ht position lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position 030932725 Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Manual Lumbar Support If Equipped Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped For models equipped with manual lumbar the support This feature allows the front passenger seatback to fold lever is located on the inboard side of the seat Turn the flat for extended cargo space Some fold flat seats also lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the have a hardback surface that you can use as a work desired amount of lumbar support surface when the seat is folded flat Pull up on the lever to fold down the seatback 030932915 030932730 Lumbar Support Lever Fold Flat Passenger Seat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNINCG The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior t
260. iameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 372 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire NS TA TING AND OPERATING 373 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the
261. ically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Pinch Protect Override
262. ice Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioner The belt for driver seating position is equipped with a retractor pretensioning device the belt for passenger seating position is equipped with both retractor and buckle pretensioning devices These devices are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretension ers work for all size occupants including those in
263. icle Undesirable system of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F operation or sensor damage may result when us 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa ing replacement equipment that is not of the same a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa may result but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still Fr Continued be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 393 CAUTION Continued e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure f i correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni Monitoring Telltale Light toring Sensor e Seasonal temperatu
264. id Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Multi Purpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 90 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS W Maintenance Schedule 508 O Required Maintenance Intervals 510 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N
265. ight second interval It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast th
266. ill stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 12 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 13 Oil Pressure Warning Light qm This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 14 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as
267. imilar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e f a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider d t hields behind each wheel e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges QC E of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on clear and open scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Al wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner CAUTION Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man
268. important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle
269. in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading de
270. indow will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s and front passenger s if equipped for passenger side power window switches have an Auto Up feature Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window switch up to the
271. ing Four Wheel Drive Models ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or 5 to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any number of reasons A child or others could be driving range seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the operate power windows other controls or move accelerator pedal the vehicle Normal Starting Continued 322 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts I
272. ing the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequen
273. ion 2 4 uae we aa a 198 oO Glove Box Storage Compartment 207 ll Sky Slider Full Length Open Roof If B Front Storage Compartment 208 Ea sd O Console Storage Compartment 208 Ma t M ELLE TR Mateo Area Feaires node ep deue pene pee x 209 Toky Slider Control sis ore ER oak RARR 200 Bi Cargo Load Floof seke EER tea 209 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EEEE B Rear Window Features 216 O Rear Window Defroster 217 o Rear Window Wiper Washer 216 W Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 218 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sen
274. ioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 646 oS the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near sd If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and d In very cold weather pim if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures iss emos emo rmn 92 o Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 325 O Normal Star ng soas 3 45995 RR ER UU E AE 921 H Four Speed Automatic Transmission O Extreme Cold Weather EL Gear Ranges aa ioa oa 5 45 EED ab dae ee oe ta ed ET a ll Four Wheel Drive Operation OE pogine Fals Io Start syg REDE e RR E 322 N Tanter Case ii EL ter A evened ee oe eee d aeg a 323 EGUIDDEGL 2 var eed v X3 HOU RA see ae 334 Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 929 O Selec Trac II Transfer Case If Equipped 340 W Automatic Transmission 324 W On Road Driving Tips 0 346 OKey Ignition Park Interlock 2225 d won 325 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id E Off Road Driving Tips 00 346 XO When To Use 4WD Low Range 346 O Driving Through Water iios Ra 347 oO Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 348 SM CUMING aas eo ete ne o
275. is display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3
276. is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not
277. ising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised WARNING Continued e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change 1 Remove spare tire Continued Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket As semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten sion and then to the lug wrench 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it rearward of the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be changed 060641478 Front Jacking Location For the rear tires place it under the axle by the wheel to be changed 060532826 Rear Jacking Location Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehi
278. isk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because 404 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in Fuel System Cautions the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline CAUTION Materials Added To Fuel Use the following guidelines to maintain your vehi All gasoline sold in the United States is required to cle s performance contain effective detergent additives Use of additional e The use of
279. it after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e f the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed e To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button
280. it press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or le
281. ith the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune
282. ity and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 388 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and b
283. ive Vehicles And Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range This is the normal operating mode for ESC when oper ating a two wheel drive vehicle It is also the normal mode for operating a four wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH range The ESC system will be in ESC On mode whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted out of 4WD LOW range This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off and to Full Off for additional information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Partial Off Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range The Partial Off mode is intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode raises the threshold for TCS and ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows The ESC Off button is located in the lower switch bank below the climate control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off button and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illu minate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off button and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or
284. iven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information SERVICE TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 399 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni tored by the TPMS 2
285. ized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These either side up numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the ACC position and then push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position Then remove the Key 020207279 Vehicle Key THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE e For vehicles not eguipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features such as the power window switches radio power sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC features such as the power window switches radio power sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either min ss a front door will cancel this feature The time for thi 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START ront door will cancel this feature The time for this ET feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informati
286. k up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel w
287. k Assist DEM 669 04 6 hes ADRES ee eee 4 xa 182 O Cleaning The Parksense System 182 O Parksense System Usage Precautions 183 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 185 O Before You Begin Programming Home EE 2 32 2 5 3 veoh re RE B oe 187 O Programming A Rolling Code 188 O Programming A Non Rolling Code 190 O Canadian Gate Operator Programming 191 EL ss Homelink 11259995909 DRS iii 192 PSCC A n 193 o Troubleshooting Tips a us edem es 193 O General Information 194 Mi Power Sunroof If Equipped 195 O Opening Sunroof Express 196 D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 196 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 O Closing Sunroof Express 23 999 eda 196 HOpeninie The oky Slider s iuo tx aes 201 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 196 Olose The Sky Sider uos ss ch em ao a tn 201 APinch Protect Feature 4s cw ebore essex 196 OAnti Pinch Protect F ature lt sere be Rees 202 O Piech Protect Override 2 xa 2 4 8 sd yx 197 AWind BU GHDE a4 gc ose eh yv MR Pr Ed O Venting Sunroof Express 197 O Sky Slider Maintenance O Sunshade Operation ase eg eo 197 W Electrical Power Outlet 00 205 E Visie Buffeting a sarra geet EPIS 197 MEC UDDOLRIGES oak de e SOR moi pA E eco anter atra 206 O Sunroof Maintenance 2642 kpx ERA oes TO iocur mh 207 Hlenition Off Operat
288. k entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the vr button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc 120 UNDERSTANDIN
289. k like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 385 WARNING Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not Limited use spares are for emergency use only In spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wea
290. l Off mode The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light is always illu minated when ESC is off To turn ESC on again momen tarily press the ESC Off button This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation e Full Off is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range The ESC system will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case is shifted into AWD LOW range e The ESC OFF message will display and a chime will sound when the shift lever is moved from any position to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was cleared previously WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability Full Off mode is only intended for off highway or off road use ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilo
291. lace Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Ne button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the es button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the vr button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the wo button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is ce
292. ld be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EJ 7E CO EIE 055703771 Tire Rotation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 CAUTION Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increas
293. ld be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK T
294. lder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Fre ge fe Rae bars 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPE
295. le Storage Compartment The front storage compartment located on the left side of To open press the latch and lift the cover the instrument panel can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items 035232795 Center Console Front Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 The center console has a removable storage tray which WARNING can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items m Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Load Floor The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 Ibs 035232796 181 kg The load floor has a built in storage bin that can Removable Storage Tray hold a variety of items The underside of the storage bin cover also contains a plastic lined tray The cover can be installed with either side facing up for added utility 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room Refer to Seats in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Accessing The Storage Bin NOTE The spring lo
296. le brush scrub in all directions over the stain Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the area with warm water If the stain is still apparent repeat the cleaning procedure When the stain is no longer showing rinse the complete top with warm water Let the top dry before opening it Protection For appearance purposes You may wish to protect the acrylic cloth top periodically A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard is suggested The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant CAUTION Avoid getting Scotchguard on the surrounding weather strips moldings paint or glass Damage to these items might occur Weather Strip Care Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent to keep them soft and pliable Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 The following maintenance recom
297. leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law detergents or other additives is not needed under normal Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor conditions and they would result in additional cost mance and damage the emission control system Therefore you should not have to add anything to the An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition fuel malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 405 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed engi
298. lets selected with the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected 045639067 e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi nate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost
299. lippery The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to
300. ll phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the
301. ll prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EGUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and liftgate flipper glass for unauthorized entry and ignition for unauthorized operation While the Ve hicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and flipper glass are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will sound the horn intermittently the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for three min utes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to h
302. lly at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE The torgue converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL switch when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Command Trac ll Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information And Precautions The Command Trac II transfer case provides four posi tions e Two wheel drive 2WD high range e Four wheel drive AWD LOCK high range e Four wheel drive AWD LOW low range e Neutral N This transfer case is intended to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and high way conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required select the transfer case AWD LOCK position or 4WD LOW position This NS TA TING AND OPERATING 335 position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft CAUTION Continued together and forces the front and rear wheels to rot
303. ly operates when in the FM mode Foreign Language Information Jazz News NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped gt I e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a
304. m can cause serious injury or death ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 1 This device may not cause harmful interference e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 POWER SUNROOF IF EGUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or Power Sunroof Switch any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automat
305. m acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equip
306. m h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off 18 TOW HAUL Indicator If Equipped This light will illuminate when selecting TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is lo cated on the gearshift bezel TOW HAUL 19 4WD Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Command Trace This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode In this mode the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are me chanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 20 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off ee OFF N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 21 SERV Service 4WD Indicator Light If Eguipped The SERV 4WD Indicator Light will turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position and it will stay on for two seconds If the light stays on or turns on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required SERV 4WD 22 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi ew tion As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the tempera ture gauge to pass H the indic
307. m moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNINCG vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per Continued sonal injury Continued 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Saf
308. mains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 31 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected
309. mar Alternate s X three O tw fj eight nine star e O C G continue delete dial download edit home p 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Voice Commands Voice Commands Primar Primar language return to main menu select phone send N set up phone settings or phone list names list phones mobile mute off towing assistance new entr transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again OO n other pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again o redial N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the eguipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice
310. may cause undesired operation N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter 2 may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Liftgate closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed System not disabled from previo
311. mber is ouk me 479 ki 9 e se OE OE TED RESTER 478 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 476 504 505 Corrosion Protection iuuenes xx eee cage ee os 488 Si AE usu doe RR dS ROS ACE Y IE OT 238 COPRONO gears aee Po gee RR dps ees 206 Customer Assistance sn 525 Data Recorder Event llle 77 Daytime Running Lights osse sd EER vee wo EER 161 Dealer Service SE ee 463 Defroster Rear Window 217 Defroster Windshield 91 305 311 Delay Intermittent Wipers 166 Diagnostic System Onboard 460 Dimmer Switch Headlight 162 Dipsticks CAL TBUPITIP 245 gives REIS Aon d Ee Gee Power EOS 212242 3 3 410339 94 ease oes Disabled Vehicle Towing 538 INDEX NEE id Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 42 rs 478 Eie ie Od iss spas dae oe ee HEES DR 466 Door LOCKS soes 04 ARE RARR IS Kee 24 30 Door Locks Automatic 4864 sa ivaenavdsadwa 32 Door Opener Garage aa soe PRES VOER ice i 185 ID cT ae eee eS eee 346 O Pavement as ER eee bbs tenet tiwi 346 OIE Rod Greceteceseeceuus ED HO dv cq 346 OES ees AE EE HAS DEAD Mr 346 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow otanding Waler s cu VEE KRAKE ER SES as 346 When to Use Low Range 346 Electric Remote Mirrors si iss ramo xs 101 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 203 Electrical Power Outlets soc iss prex rh t 203 Electronic Brake Control System
312. memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System f Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconn
313. mendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e nsects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or eguiva lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint 7 e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials considered the responsibility of the owner such as steel wool or scouring powder which will e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or s
314. meters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF 370 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Press
315. months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If its sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If its cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and sd then turn the air t TY condit
316. n SABIC also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING WARNING C
317. n TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the control handle upward until it is fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column pull the lever downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the st
318. n Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Easy Exit Seat If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until OFE 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and hold the SELECT button until OFF 90 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and th
319. n Have the air bags and seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer immedi ately Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The system The air bag may inflate accidentally or Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal may not function properly if modifications are circuits and interconnecting wiring associated made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer with air bag system electrical components While the air for any air bag system service If your seat includ bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be the following occurs have an authorized dealer service serviced in any way including removal or jhe air bag system immediately loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during manufacturer approved seat accessories may be the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system first turned to the ON RUN position for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to e
320. n has been reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Passenger Power Seat If Equipped Vehicle s equipped with passenger power seats can only be adjusted forward and backward 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Heated Seats If Equipped seat belt On some models the front driver and passenger seats Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions shoulder belt is no longer resting against your and seatbacks chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death There are two hea
321. n instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the Ave button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say 3746 ft Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phoneboo
322. nch When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel NOTE Refer to Compact Spare Tire under Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for information about the compact spare tire its use and operation 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jacking 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING 060505162 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off when the vehicle is being jacked the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake help prevent personal injury or damage to your 4 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis vehicle sion or REVERSE manual transmission Continued 5 Turn the ignition to the LOCK position WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441 WARNING Continued Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before ra
323. nd vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING e You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is h
324. nd follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dial By Saying A Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can
325. nd the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a shift move the transfer case switch back to the original position make certain all shift reguirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4WD LOW Range When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to incre
326. ndicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position 330 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the TOW HAUL mode or select the 2 range at lower speeds Under these conditions using TOW HAUL mode or the 2 range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331
327. nds you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Sve button 2 Say a command e g Help N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In system is speaking Please note the volume setting for this mode you may say the following commands Voice Command is different than the audio system e Frequency to change the frequency Main M Er e Next Station to select the next station 3 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command evr button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main e Previous Station to select the previous station menu e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu In this mode you can say the following commands ME AE TE nea mene Radio FM e Disc to switch to the disc mode To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e Set
328. ne axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and that is will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be dist
329. ne running for an extended period If the against you vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued 406 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Cap ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 CAUTION WARNING e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula
330. nections could permit exhaust fumes to seep be grass or leaves coming into contact with your into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri hicle in areas where your exhaust system can cation or oil change Replace as required contact anything that can burn WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Continued Continued 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION Continued e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter a
331. nets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped he antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWH Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 12KK74 126 AC ard Edition Printed in U S A
332. ngine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 509 e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 510 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once A Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Failure to perform the required maintenance items damage 5 may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals Proper operation of four wheel
333. ns Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment
334. nsmis 81c4fd4e sion is in PARK Hill Descent Button e HDC will NOT activate on level ground Enabling HDC e HDC will NOT activate at vehicle speeds above UL RE E into Pic mae pus to 30 mph 50 km h PE eel Drive peration in Starting and Operat ing for further information NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 365 2 Press the Hill Descent button The Hill Descent Control Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will turn on solid NOTE If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Disabling HDC 1 Press the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case out of WD LOW range The Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn off Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
335. nt Release Hood Reminder Lights On Reminder Seat Belt Remote Control Slate Sy Stell socie EE HORE HEDE eee BEE 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE a res 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 301 Remote Starting Systeni s ses sics P4 dos Ear cae s 27 Replacement Bulbs 12 32a o N EE ER dete n 500 Replacement REYS uacua 208 OPEREER EE ORES an 16 Replacement PariS PPM 463 Replacement Mes onewe tro DE ELE waa bags 387 Reporting Safety Defects 422 a gode been ves 528 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 238 245 Restraint Head 246544424 VEER EERS bonds 145 Restraints Child eee 78 Restraints Occupant 242 6493 2494 riadit iwi 42 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 213 Rol Over Wartime s dece BEREA HER Pea RE os 4 Roof oky older LOWE 22 2 sb ee se RES 198 486 Boot Type Carer ass ie eee he SEER eee eee 218 N INDEX 549 Rotation Tires ue 654 5 RR 4600 RUIS a Ra 390 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle i s em ns 90 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 92 Safety Defects Reporting 4s ode ssa kx o oa 528 Safety Information Tire 370 eind bie MAAS IE TE RR d NS OT EK 88 Salep Exhaust GaS aoo es 8 ie ORE EE RED EEG 89 Satellite Radio Antenna 272 297 Schedule Maintenance leen 508 Seat Belt Maintenance sie sie bonn dem 9 9 PUER 494 Seat Belt Reminder sie cui ROER 48404 64 0 58 Seat Belts ee ee 45 90 Adjustable Upper Shoulde
336. nt or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper
337. o contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 527 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1
338. o operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Ihings To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjust forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to ment button located at the base of the head restraint and the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the push downward on th
339. o rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 338 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The four wheel drive indicator lights AWD and 4 LOW are located in the instrument cluster The NEUTRAL indicator light is located on the transfer case switch If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case position is two wheel drive 2WD If the indicator light is on the desired position AWD LOCK 4WD LOW or NEUTRAL has been obtained If One Or More Shift Requirements Are Not Met e An indicator light will flash e The transfer case will not shift NOTE The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electric shift four wheel drive system If this light re mains on after engine start up or it illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required Shifting Procedures NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain on and the newly selected posi
340. o store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phon
341. ocated in the instrument cluster The NEUTRAL indica tor light is located on the transfer case switch If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case posi tion is two wheel drive 2WD If the indicator light is on the desired position AWD AUTO 4WD LOW or NEU TRAL has been obtained If One Or More Shift Requirements Are Not Met e An indicator light will flash e The transfer case will not shift NOTE The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electric shift four wheel drive system If this light re mains on after engine start up or it illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required Shifting Procedures NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain on and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift move the transfer case switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD To 4WD Auto Move the transfer case switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD Auto can be done with the NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 345 vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must
342. of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg NS TA TING AND OPERATING 423 CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision Continued WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a f
343. ogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion
344. oid your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or pet form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or gualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrica
345. ol knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Tum the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following Program Type 16 Digit Character Display format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display BEd ad Blues ope ect N undefined e Religious Talk Rel Talk Adult Hik m Classical Classic Rock Cls Rock College Countr By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function on
346. ollowing positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the out
347. on Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Ignition Switch Positions e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In lgnition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ize
348. on Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob
349. ontinued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Continued your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 2 The seat belt latch plate is located on the B Pillar along 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch the outboard side and rear of the seat cushion The re
350. or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 WARNING Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventuall
351. or is located UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 3 Press the DOWN button until Compass Variance displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map NOTE The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1 The Default Variance is Zone 8 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit 4 Average Fuel Economy 8 9 040506040 Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset van Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset the history information will be 1 Turn the ignition switch ON erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Compass Variance Map To Change The Compass Variance 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value When the DTE value is le
352. orn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center con tains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover we Totally menad Power Module Cavity Cartridge Mini Description LE EUM 072739262 30 es Case Module Pink If Equipped Bl elel n MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Natural Pink Unlock If Equipped Ka IN di E E a Yellow J6 40 Amp Antilock Brakes Green Pump Stability Con J14 40 Amp Rear Defroster If System If Green Equipped Bu ped J15 40 Amp Front Blower Antilock Brakes Green de 4 iim Con 40 Amp NEM Starter Solenoid Equipped Green p EE J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control TS E EP Dra ETE 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Front Wiper M6 20 Amp Rain Sensor If Yellow Equipped Front Washer Rear M7 20 Amp Cigar Lighter Washer If Equipped Yellow Sunroof Module If M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seats Equipped Yellow If Equipped 15 Amp Stop Light Swith M9 Blue Feed Rear Center Ignition Off Draw Brake Lamp Vehicle Entertainment 20 Amp Trailer Lighting If System Satellite Digi Yellow Equipped tal Receiver
353. osts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigera
354. ot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C condenser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAUTION CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a
355. ou just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EvR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook HUBS aoe e Press the button to begin e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot
356. ou leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will tion there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road con ditions permit You or others could be injured Shift Positions alaw herci cdo Ed OT EA N N The transfer case switch is located on the center console is in PARK The parking brake should always be next to the shift lever applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 81c686ba Transfer Case Switch 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is used for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD Lock Four Wheel Drive High Range This range locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces only 4WD Low Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive Locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels t
357. ould Know About Your Uconnect PHONG sie xx op ue DERS s 127 O General Information 133 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Bl Voice Command If Equipped H Voice Command System Operation 0 Commands O Voice Training W Seats O Driver s Power Seat If Equipped O Heated Seats lt Eguipped 212 2 9 RAL 9 O Manual Front Seat Adjustments O Front Seat Manual Recline 3 Manual Lumbar Support If Equipped O Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped O Head Restraints 133 159 134 138 138 138 140 142 143 144 144 145 360 40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat 00 TE 149 ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 151 O Programming The Memory Feature 152 O Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Io Memory ese ee 153 E Memory Position Recall s o uo hae e gece us 154 D Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory ocat OMY seile ees SR ea EER ess 155 N To Open And Close The Hood 156 RES RT RE ON SE OT N OE eek EO es 158 O Multifunction Lever ossa vo RR RR 4084 45 158 o Headlights And Parking Lights 158 H Automatic Headlights If Equipped 159 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 o Headlights With Wipers Available With ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 1
358. our and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 424 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations OTTO O70 O Q 79 Md Four Pin Connector Female Pins 4 Park 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 057003766 75 X O O O A bo od o 7 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes NS TA TING AND OPERATING 425 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range activate the TOW HAUL feature Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting and Operating for further information NOTE Using the TOW HAUL feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im prove performance and extend transmission life by re ducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous opera
359. our vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel
360. ovide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file fo
361. oward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 328 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle
362. p of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Automatic Transmission nate the brake fluid Brake se
363. ped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON RUN and then back to OFF five times ending up in the ON RUN position 3 Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To use the system open each rear door use a flat blade screwdriver or ignition key and rotate the dial counter clockwise to engage the Child Protection lock and clock wise to disengage the Child Protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position e ar 021807374 Child Protection Door Lock NOTE e When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi tion After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door
364. pplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi window sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your e An energy absorbing steering column and steering passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep voire the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e All seat belt systems except the driver s and rear e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating center include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs positions which lock the seat belt webbing into position by e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting ger the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped e Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible I
365. pre programmed memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the key from the ignition 2 Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Press and release the SET button on the memory switch then within five seconds press and release the 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the EVIC if equipped 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to the memory setting by pressing the SET button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE e For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi tions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped e For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph 0 km h to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph 0 km h a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two
366. r Anchorage 50 And Pregnant Women 21399 9 xe ms 59 Child Restraint 4 is SERE 4584 EER S 78 79 85 bsc M PC OR EER AE 59 prone C ru 45 IUSDecHOIE ie KERR d eo eee ee ED RUP 90 Dietens Oes aw pb4RG AG Wu Ge ee peas 54 KemunGel C 238 bhoulder Bell Anchorage sedes ded ues ox 50 Untwisting Procedure es ss es 51 io REEL r rcr 138 ASNC ereere akide DAE OD ee oy ENEN 138 Pag POE ALT SEE ETE ET E oso 155 Head Restrainis isi Ko modes de 44264455 145 sito M tye a Wawa RED ER KAR PEE 140 Height AdjusBnelit v5 05 weer priri tanis 138 Libor ou DONE senres ea p eee sone WENKE 144 hler sakie EER ER EDE e444 ea OOR dol POU A Gau sies M 138 Rear FOMIO a4 54 4 AE gui guid 24444 149 PA iir Cr ne een E He 143 SeatDack Release m 149 TES uides t9 3 ES XE 9 x erbe RS 138 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 240 Selec Trac Operation 550 INDEX NEE Id Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 476 505 Selection of Oil sues pcr REY PEG 465 Sentry Key Immobilizer 134 pm 06 05 4 Kes 14 Sentry Key Programming ies see ad eee ee kod 16 Sentry Key Replacement is caede en a oie eben 16 Service Assistance 0 0 eee eee ees 525 Service CONI acs ass ER EES boda Seba bas 527 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator qx a o 4 yrs 228 Service Manuals eee eee 529 DOUG He GIOCK iis d Sb ior PR DS 258 277 286 eties Personal sers se ded ERA AAR KEER
367. r Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is eguipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use tenance required a booster battery or any other booster source with WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery p
368. r Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 522 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per D P 525 O Prepare For The Appointment 525 APrepare A List 64444 d eed apne ade rra 929 O Be Reasonable With Requests 525 N If You Need Assistance 525 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 526 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 526 Hn Medco Contactes aa x ES AD RAS BL 526 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 527 A Seve CONOCI 4 eeudna ie we se sees E 3 927 Bl Warranty Information 528 BE MOPAR Parts oe se res Re En 528 W Reporting Safety Defects 528 O In The 50 United States And Washington prop C O In Canada N P
369. r case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction PET NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED di den NOT ALLOWED 428 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake Place the transmission in PARK 4 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Remove the ignition key 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected will result in severe transmission damage WARNING If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even if the transmission is in PARK which could cause serious injury or death The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa tion The parking brake must remain engaged unless the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled Se
370. r driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in
371. r indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced CAUTION Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de pends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various 055007576 factors including but not limited to 1 Worn Tire e Driving style 2 New Tire e lire pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size qual
372. r inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 382 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits W
373. r towing If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition must be in the ON RUN or ACC position not in the LOCK OFF position Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear Wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL Speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455 CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift or towing dolly or remove the driveshaft WARNING If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even if the transmission is in PARK
374. r vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owmer s Manual For Further Information 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing INTRODUCTION 5 seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a sea
375. raking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet capacity than what was originally equipped on SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the your vehicle Using a tire with a smallerload index Proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain could lose control and have a collision rear tires with P225 75R16 or smaller tires Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 389 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions e Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than P225 75R16 or smaller tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition
376. ramming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer lraining The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks
377. raphic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to
378. ration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sens
379. re changes will affect tire pressure NOTE and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care the tire 5 and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire x Base System failure or condition The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to while adjusting your tire pressure monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes readings to the receiver module the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly stopping ability and to maintain the proper pressure 394 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise
380. ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may v
381. reparations For Jump Start D Jump Starting Procedure Bl Freeing A Stuck Vehicle W Shift Lever Override Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle o Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob o Two Wheel Drive Models o Four Wheel Drive Models 436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your ve
382. ributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for informa tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information 422 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that
383. rized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 515 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104 000 miles 169 000 km whichever Inspect the CV joints comes first Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for change if using your vehicle for police damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 516 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
384. rmm SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between bed UM e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset b
385. rom the windshield wiper washer control lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive Choose position 3 for normal rain conditions Choose position 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity Choose position 4 or 5 if you desire more sensitivity Place the lever in the off position when not using the system N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 NOTE The rain sensing system has protective features for the e The rain sensing feature will not operate when the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the wiper speed is in the low or high position following conditions e The rain sensing feature may not function properly e Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The rain sensing when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance The rain sensing feature can be turned on and off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C If the wiper control is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperat
386. ronic Stability Control ESC for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period If the driver does not apply the throttle before this ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 time expires the system will release brake pressure and WARNING the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist throttle applied HSA will not activate and slight rolling may occur such as on minor hills i e less than 7 or with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is e The vehicle must be stopped always the driver s responsibility to b
387. roper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 521 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before I Change the engine oil and engine oil 144 000 miles 234 000 km filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 152 000 miles 247 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repai
388. ry passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo Tie Down Loops Cargo tie down loops are located on the trim panels NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 WARNING Continued e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway Continued the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats The
389. s Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR 410 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been
390. s ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Reception Ouality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to see
391. s disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Outside of the vehicle locate the safety latch lever Two latches must be released to open the hood between the grille and hood opening left of center when facing hood Push the safety latch lever to the right and 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side ibam ase the hood of the instrument panel 031332875 Underhood Safety Latch Hood Release N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole WARNING on the underside of the hood Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open CAUTION when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious To pre
392. s illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with belt alert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender
393. s may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructio
394. s of equal size type and circumfer ence on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information CAUTION e The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driving in this posi tion on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline components Continued 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING WARNING Continued e You or others could be injured if you leave the e Since four wheel drive provides improved trac vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury tion there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road con ditions permit Yo
395. s on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre gem es BE Rate Gems 320 256 224 192 160 128 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 T a 24 22 05 16 aye 56 48 Sampling Fre eka d Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA file
396. s the units used for the Outside Temperature Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Tire Pressure features Press and release the SELECT button to toggle units between U S and METRIC System Status Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning Messages stored Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are active Warning Messages stored Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRES ENT is displayed will display each stored warning for each button press Press and Release the MENU button to return to the Main Menu Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transmission or when the shift lever is in PARK auto transmission Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC then press the SELECT button 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Use the DOWN button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if eguipped Press the SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Au
397. shift again The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Selec Trac Il Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information And Precautions The Selec Trac II active on demand transfer case pro vides four positions e Two wheel drive 2WD high range e Four wheel drive Auto 4WD AUTO high range e Neutral N e Four wheel drive AWD LOW low range This transfer case is intended to be driven in either the two wheel drive position 2WD or the four wheel drive Auto position AWD AUTO for normal street and high way conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 For added capability when traversing steep grades CAUTION Continued rough terrain or extremely poor traction surfaces select the transfer case 4WD LOW position This position locks When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and engine speed E approximately three times that of forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same the 2WD position or 4WD AUTO position at a speed while multiplying engine torque given road speed Take care not to over speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles de pends on tire
398. sign of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
399. sly or fatally injured Children should be driver is not in the vehicle warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 355 WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the s
400. sor to the right of the button does not illuminate 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Switch 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Left and Right Mirror Select 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Models With Express Window Feature Press and release the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is
401. ss than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display Tire PSI Press and release the MENU button until Tire PSI is displayed Tire pressure information is displayed as follows e f tire pressure is OK for all tires TIRE and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or the graphic e f oneor more tires have low pressure LOW TIRE and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the graphic Tire pressure values that are too low will be flashing e f the Tire Pressure System requires service Service TPM System is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position Elapsed time is displayed as follows hours minutes seconds Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START EVIC Units Selection UNITS IN Display Display
402. st are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 532 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 534 IN
403. strictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA track
404. strument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407554 Dimmer Control Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console and above the rear doors by the grab handles Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned completely upward to the second detent Cargo Light The cargo light is mounted in the headliner above the rear cargo area This light will turn on when you open the liftgate or any door or if you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or rotate the dimmer control on the multifunction lever completely upward to the second detent Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
405. system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL and operate at lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on the end of the multifunction lever 031407555 Front Fog Light Control NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flas
406. t You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 24 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped This light indicates that the transmission fluid F temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 25 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button Changing the Display Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode On vehicles equipped with a Base Cluster press and release it once again to display the outside temperature
407. t must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat modified to accommodate a disabled person contact as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided Refer to Child Restraints under If You Need Assistance You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more 2 All ts should al their d EE eames HOL HEEL op EN severe injuries in a collision The air bags work shoulder belts properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Always wear your seat belts even though you have Front Air Bags room to inflate air bags 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your Continued vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtai
408. t belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION e te JF n X gt SL WATER iM FUEL EUN M exon wun HIGH BEAM FT i UV 2D I t MASTER LzHTIM SWITCH WX AE AR WERD WTERMITTENT WER ER p M pm FUEL PILL SIDE M DOME LHAT 0 FRONT FOG LIGHT ESP BAS ELECT MM ry e 0 d a c TURM SIGNALS TED SEAT A MM u DEAT a HEATED DOOR LOOF iik E 3 a a OD ES REY ACTOATE LPPET AND LOWER ms Roa Wende LIFT imr oc ya HILL DESSERT POWER OUTLET MR OUTLET CONTHOL BRAKE L PE a rd aa Bow A RECINCULATIC ELECTHONIC HOOD RELEANE LEBER AIH ALL YIHERL PLUME DE ANTHLOER IMITLET DRIVE AO BTrhUmIrY CONTROL Mar ETSIEM v dE c a VI we yl De mon Wa Baie LD ELE GT INGANG ERANE SYSTEM ENGINE DEL RE AN WIE p 0x4 PARE LEHTA BEAR ETI LAMP EG EE GAT AND VEHTILATMO FAN WIHOUW LUCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARRING DiTADOET DPEM LOWER hul DUTLET C
409. t carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH All children whose weight or height is abo
410. t tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed EQUIPPED Control WARNINCG Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or s
411. tch for four sec onds until the light behind the NEUTRAL N symbol starts to blink indicating shift in progress The light will 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL N is complete 8 Start the engine 10 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Turn OFF the engine 12 Firmly apply the parking brake B 13 Shift the transmission into PARK and remove the ignition key m Neutral Switch 432 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL N and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL N ensure that the engine is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 14 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 15 Release the parking brake NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and the shift has been completed If any of these require ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the four second timer then the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position
412. tected Detected Detected d mene Flashing Flashing RdioMue No Ys Ys Ys Ys NOTE ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when Sound and is Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa the system is sounding an audio tone tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or Pya When the ParkSense switch is pressed to through the Customer Programmable Features section of A disable the system the instrument cluster will the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or OF display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when Park Sense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime onc
413. ted seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate thelevelof within two to five minutes heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 min utes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat h
414. th the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 11 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activationl Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator funi Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds w
415. the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones Press the Se button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect M Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VR button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the amp vR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command N UNDERSTANDIN
416. the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound However it will cause a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to display in the EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed 398 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be dr
417. the ON RUN position 2 Fuel Door Reminder This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle lt where the fuel cap is located 3 Low Fuel Light This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to approximately one eighth tank 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Fach tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should deter mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility
418. the button will illuminate when e Use care when washing the inside of the rear the rear window defroster is on The rear window window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on defroster automatically turns off after approximately the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to press the button a second time the heating elements Labels can be peeled off NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear after soaking with warm water window defroster only when the engine is operating Do not use scrapers sharp Instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED NOTE Crossbars are offered by MOPAR accessories NOTE Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on External racks do not increase the total load carrying vehicles equipped with Skyslider capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack Check t
419. the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the lock ring clockwise to lock it in place 7 Close the hood 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker Lamp 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right to access the left front turn signal or side marker Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left to access the right front turn signal or side marker 2 Remove three push pins from the wheel well liner 3 Gently flex the wheel well liner forward to access the bulb 4 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 5 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace ment bulb 6 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reposition the wheel well liner and install the push pins Front Fog Lamp 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the bulb 3 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp housing 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace ment bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severel
420. the seats in the second row check to be sure they don t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer If there is a fault present in the air bag system the Air Bag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should have an autho rized dealer service the system immediately The Air Bag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation of the air bag system If there is a fault present in the PAD Indicator Light the Air Bag Warning Light will be illuminated to show that the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be turned off until the fault is cleared If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver And Passenger
421. the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature press and release the MENU button once for each step A step from the last item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed The following features are in the Main menu e Compass Outside Temperature and Audio Information ECO display e Average Fuel Economy e Distance to Empty e Tire Pressure Status display e Flapsed Time e EVIC Units Selection e System Status e Personal Settings NOTE For features in the EVIC that can be reset Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time the EVIC prompts a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word RESET next to it When the SELECT button is pressed the selected feature will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the SELECT button graphic Pressing SELECT a second time will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time After three seconds without pressing SELECT RESET ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature will have been reset Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped D the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight COMPASS compass headings the outside temperature Button The compass readings indicate the direction NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 and audio information if
422. thorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank Key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following proce
423. thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is
424. tical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper air bag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The following requirements must be strictly adhered to Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by Chrysler Group LLC Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS and or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards CMVSS Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events e Atno time should any Supplemental Restraint System SRS component or SRS related
425. tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 512 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine 24 000 miles 39 000 km Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for change if using your vehicle for police damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing
426. tion the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding 1 quart 0 9 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa Hon NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recom mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute
427. tion then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals TOW HAUL To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly areas or select the 2 range on more severe grades Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting and Operat ing for further information 426 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Electronic Speed Control If Eguipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily STARTING AND OPERATING 427 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Two Wheel Drive Four Wheel Drive Models Ground Models See Instructions Flat Tow NOT ALLOWED e Transmission in PARK e Transfe
428. tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift move the transfer case switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD To 4WD Lock Move the transfer case switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after mov ing the transfer case switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 339 engine either OFF or RUNNING This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position NOTE The four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the original posi tion indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning Delayed shifting out of AWD LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading 4WD Lock To 4WD Low When shifting into or out of AWD LOW some gear noise
429. tion presets 3 Press and release the SET button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 within five seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position is being set If desired a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows 1 Turn the ignition ON N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 2 within five seconds The EVIG if eguipped will display which memory position is being set NOTE e For vehicles eguipped with an automatic transmission memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e For vehicles eguipped with a manual transmission the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph 0 km h to recall a memory profile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two
430. tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 374 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile
431. tle 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 Hlenition Key Removal 14 242 aa de 12 O Key In Ignition Reminder 14 Sentry RE EE RT OE eiii 14 E Replacement Keys sis oo km FO ERROR ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 16 Er General Infortiallofl 22s amare s 17 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 O Rearming Of The System iis we n EE yes 18 H To Amm The System uan screw eg 18 D To Disarm The System saw spek RR A Rs 19 Ia laminated Entry 22929 ix asse xx ena 20 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 o To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 2 D To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 o To Unlatch The Liftgate Flipper Glass 24 O Using Ihe Panic Alarm is sese 24 O Programming Additional Transmitters 25 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id O Pattery Replacement us EE KLAER EER DE 2D O General Information 04 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 D How To Use Remote Start 27 M Door Locks 2294 44x AREA P4 793 1029 8
432. to Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears RKE Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door Ist Press or All Doors 1st Press appears RKE Linked To Memory If Equipped When on is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the memory switch on the driver s door panel will recall memory profiles To make your selection press and release the SELECT NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 button until ON or OFF appears Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information Sound Horn With Lock When on
433. top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 022607497 022607757 1 Downward Movement 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 2 Rearward Movement 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 gt P AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Light remain
434. type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 323 With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is found under the hood clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving
435. u or others could be injured Shift Positions The transfer case switch is located on the center console next to the shift lever Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 343 81c357ca Transfer Case Switch 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD Auto Four Wheel Drive Auto High Range This active on demand range makes available optimum traction for a wide range of conditions while maximizing driver con venience This position is always in four wheel drive mode with a normal 4276 front axle 5876 rear axle torque split The system also anticipates and prevents slip by redirecting torque as necessary up to 100 to the front or rear axle if needed 4WD Low Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range is for low speed four wheel drive Locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h 344 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id N Neutral This range disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The four wheel drive indicator lights 4WD 4 LOW are l
436. uality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty NS TA TING AND OPERATING 403 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased r
437. ublication Order Forms 524 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire E Tra lion Grades visse bs He DER tarit ri 531 Quality Gede P 591 LU Treadwear ixi BEE DES SES EE Y Rond 531 D Temperature Grades 44 6 ans oa oh ED EE S 532 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 525 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you
438. ular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console 035132771 Front Cupholders N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the STORAGE center console Glove Box Storage Compartment The glove box storage compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel Pull outward on the latch to open the storage compartment N 035132773 aS Glove Box Storage Compartment Rear Cupholders 035232911 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Storage Compartment Conso
439. unction lever out of the AUTO position 031407553 Headlight Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic mode 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Headlights With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay If Equipped This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area It provides the safety of headlight illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the igni tion switch to the LOCK position To activate the delay turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights Only the headlights will illuminate during this time If you turn the headlights or parking lights or ignition switch ON again the
440. und level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations t
441. up to switch to system setup e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Disc s Mun Wenn Go eie Ee DR EED To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com e Next Track to play the next track mands e Track t to change the track e Previous Track to play the previous track Ch l d h he ch l e Channel Number to change the channel by its Main Menu toswiteh 45 the main menu spoken number Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In e Previous Channel to select the previous channel this mode you may say the following commands e Next Channel to select the next channel e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command VR button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu the following commands e Select Name to say the name of a channel e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Save to save the memo NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
442. upant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Serv
443. ure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall d
444. ure rises above freezing the rain sensing feature will then op erate Neutral Wipe Inhibit The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Remote Start Wipe Inhibit Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start System The rain sensing feature will not operate when the vehicle is in remote start mode This feature will return to normal operation once remote start mode is exited Refer to Remote Start System in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Headlights With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further informatio
445. ure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged WARNING Continued have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams over materials that can burn Such materials might or loose con
446. us remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar e Remote Start Aborted System Fault e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e f your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start an
447. use sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Y Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 6 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I v an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to O
448. ust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Tum the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the so
449. utton is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use
450. ve the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 NOTE For additional information refer to Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana restraint dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm WARNINCG
451. vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service shou
452. vent possible damage is on deal e Before closing hood make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips e Lower the hood to approximately 6 in 15 2 cm above the closed position and drop the hood to latch it e Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signal lights instrument panel lights instru ment panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights if equipped 031407552 Multifunction Lever Headlights And Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation 031407553 Headlight Switch Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position third detent When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means the UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System off turn the end of the multif
453. vice s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042340030 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2685 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it 286 UNDERSTANDING YOU
454. vides engine compression brak ing at low speeds Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controll
455. when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off button Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High And 4WD Low Range The Full Off mode is intended for off highway and off road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions The ESC Off button is located in the lower switch bank below the climate control panel To enter Full Off mode press and hold the ESC Off button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds the ESC Activation 368 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate and an ESC NOTE OFF message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instru ment cluster to turn off this message In this mode ESC and TCS are turned off except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km k At speeds over 40 mph 64 km k the system automatically switches to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system will return to Ful
456. when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink
457. xle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability brak ing performance and could result in a collision Continued 414 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information 057005577 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct 057005576 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect NS TA TING AND OPERATING 415 Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 057005578 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added eguipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehi
458. y The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK gASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 For states that require an Inspection and Mainte I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL
459. y make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the T blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped
460. y or May 4L Head Restraint Front Half not deploy in the event of a front or side impact Soft Foam and Trim Coen However if during a front impact a secondary rear 4 Head Restraint Guide 2 Seatback Tub impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever Hee ity and type of the impact 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the have moved forward as shown in step three of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism resetting procedure f 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the
461. y part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Occupant Classification System OCS The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle It is designed to turn off the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an empty seat and for occupants classified in a category other than an adult This could be a child teenager or even an adult NOTE Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e Occupant Classification Module OCM The OCM is located beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The O
462. y poison you To avoid breathing CO riding in these areas are more likely to be seri follow these safety tips ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or belts out of the area Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the ex
463. y shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector clockwise to lock it in place 6 Close the hood Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Back Up Lamp 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the screws that fasten the taillamp housing to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 073363109 3 Pull the taillamp housing straight back to separate it from the vehicle 4 Disconnect the electrical connector 5 Remove the two screws that fasten the back plate to the taillamp housing 6 Separate the back plate from the taillamp housing 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 7 Pull the appropriate bulb s out of the back plate and 9 Connect the electrical connector insert the replacement bulb s 10 Install the taillamp housing and screws 8 Install the back plate and screws into the taillamp housing FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 19 5 Gallons 73 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 7 Liters 11 Close the liftgate Cooling System EE EE 3 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 14 Quarts 13 3 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Flu
464. ype of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the SABIC The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABIC inflates This especially applies to children The SABIC is only about 3 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger air bag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are cri
465. zed Service Center 518 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant at Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for 104 000 miles 169 000 km or 60 months damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary whichever comes first M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Insp
466. zed Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 514 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 64 000 miles 104 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine 56 000 miles 91 000 km Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Autho

2012 Jeep Liberty Owner`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents